931-932 - User Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 306

AMETEK Western Research

Model 931 Single-Gas UV Analyzer


and
Model 932 Multi-Gas UV Analyzer

User Manual

TQM
COMMITTED TO TOTAL QUALITY
Process Instruments
PN 903-8600, Rev. D Western Research
2876 Sunridge Way N.E.
Calgary, Alberta, Canada T1Y 7H9
Offices

USA – HEADQUARTERS GERMANY


150 Freeport Road Postfach 2165
Pittsburgh, PA 15238 D-40644 Meerbusch
Phone: 412-828-9040 OR
Fax: 412-826-0399 Rudolf-Diesel Strasse 16
D-40670 Meerbusch
Phone: 49-21-59-9136-0
USA – Delaware Fax: 49-21-59-9136-80
455 Corporate Boulevard
Newark, Delaware 19702
Phone: 302-456-4400 FRANCE
Fax: 302-456-4444 AMETEK
ZA de la Clef St Pierre
Rond point de l’Epine des Champs
USA – Texas BuroPlus Batiment D
9750 Whithorn Drive 78990 ELANCOURT FRANCE
Houston, Texas 77095 Phone: 33 1 30 68 89 20
Phone: 281-463-2820 Fax: 33 1 30 68 89 29
Fax: 281-463-2701

CHINA
CANADA Room 406, Metro Tower
2876 Sunridge Way N.E. No. 30 Tian Yao Qiao Road
Calgary, Alberta T1Y 7H9 Shanghai, 200030
Phone: 403-235-8400 Phone: 8621 6426 7049
Fax: 403-248-3550 Fax: 8621 6426 7054

© 2005 AMETEK Process & Analytical Instruments Division Printed in Canada


This manual is a guide for the use of the Model 931 UV Single-Gas and Model 932 UV Multi-Gas Analyzers. Data herein has been verified and validated
and is believed adequate for the intended use of this instrument. If the instrument or procedures are used for purposes over and above the
capabilities specified herein, confirmation of their validity and suitability should be obtained; otherwise, AMETEK does not guarantee results and
assumes no obligation or liability. This publication is not a license to operate under, or a recommendation to infringe upon, any process patents.

ii | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Contents
Offices ..................................................................................................................... ii
Safety Notes .......................................................................................................... ix
Electrical Safety .................................................................................................... ix
Grounding ............................................................................................................ ix
Personnel and Equipment Safety Information ............................................... x
Warnings ......................................................................................................... x
Cautions ......................................................................................................... xi
Warning Labels ................................................................................................... xii
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .......................................................... xiii
EQUIPMENT USED IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS .............................. xiv
EC Declaration of Conformity ........................................................................ xv
WARRANTY AND CLAIMS ........................................................................... xvi

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Theory of the Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers ............................ 1-1
Model 932 Multi-Gas UV Analyzers ....................................................... 1-2
Model 931 Single-Gas UV Analyzers ...................................................... 1-2
Features ............................................................................................................... 1-3
Application ......................................................................................................... 1-4
Implementation ................................................................................................. 1-4
Microcontroller Board and Host Controller Board.............................. 1-5
Discrete Wavelengths ................................................................................ 1-6
About the Analyzer Sample System ............................................................... 1-7
Relays ................................................................................................................... 1-9
Status Relays ................................................................................................ 1-9
Alarm Relays .............................................................................................. 1-10
Solid State Relays ...................................................................................... 1-10

CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS
Methodology ...................................................................................................... 2-1
Standard Range Measuring Cell .................................................................... 2-1
Response Time ................................................................................................... 2-2
Measurement Accuracy ................................................................................... 2-2
Repeatability ....................................................................................................... 2-2
Calibration .......................................................................................................... 2-2
Linearity .............................................................................................................. 2-2
Stability ................................................................................................................ 2-2
Cross-Talk ............................................................................................................ 2-2
Temperature Drift ............................................................................................. 2-2
24-Hour Zero Drift ............................................................................................ 2-3
Analog Outputs ................................................................................................. 2-3
Digital Communication ................................................................................... 2-3

Contents | iii
Electrical Requirements ................................................................................... 2-3
Maximum Start-Up Power ........................................................................ 2-3
Maximum Current / Supply Voltage....................................................... 2-4
Status Relay Contacts ................................................................................ 2-4
Typical Flow ........................................................................................................ 2-4
Ambient Limits .................................................................................................. 2-4
Temperature ................................................................................................. 2-4
Humidity ...................................................................................................... 2-4
Maximum Altitude ..................................................................................... 2-4
Zero Gas .............................................................................................................. 2-5
Sample Transport............................................................................................... 2-5
Sample Pressure Requirement (Optional) .................................................... 2-5
Instrument Air Requirements ......................................................................... 2-5
Pressure Compensation (Optional) ............................................................... 2-5
Temperature Control ........................................................................................ 2-5
Physical Dimensions (on Backpan) ............................................................... 2-6
Approvals and Certifications .......................................................................... 2-6
Hydrogen Sensor (Optional)........................................................................... 2-6
Accuracy ....................................................................................................... 2-6
Cross-Talk on Hydrogen ............................................................................ 2-6
ATEX (CENELEC) Certificate and Analyzer Marking ............................... 2-7
CSA Certificate and Analyzer Marking ...................................................... 2-10

CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND START-UP


Safety Considerations ....................................................................................... 3-2
Pre-Installation Requirements ........................................................................ 3-3
Storage Prior to Installation ...................................................................... 3-3
Uncrating and Inspection ......................................................................... 3-3
General Installation Information ............................................................. 3-4
Tools and Equipment Required ............................................................... 3-4
Installing the Mechanical Components ........................................................ 3-5
Mounting the Analyzer ............................................................................. 3-5
Location and Environment ................................................................... 3-5
Installing the Optical Bench Assembly ................................................... 3-7
Installing the Sample System ................................................................... 3-9
Installing the Sample Probe ............................................................... 3-11
Installing the Sample and Vent Lines ................................................. 3-11
Installing the Zero/Aspirator Drive Gas Line ................................... 3-12
Electrical Installation ...................................................................................... 3-13
Input/Output Signal Connections ........................................................ 3-14
Optional Interface Capabilities .......................................................... 3-14
Digital Communication ..................................................................... 3-16
Hardware Configuration (Modbus Serial Communication) ..... 3-16
Hardware Configuration (Modbus TCP Communication) ....... 3-20
Multiple-Analyzer (Multi-Drop) System Configuration ........... 3-20
AC Power Connection and Fusing ........................................................ 3-22

iv | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


System 200 Configurator Software Installation ......................................... 3-24
Minimum PC Requirements for Configurator Software .................. 3-24
Installing the System 200 Configurator Software ............................... 3-25
Removing the Configurator Software .................................................. 3-27
Analyzer Start-Up and Verification ............................................................. 3-28
Powering Up the Analyzer ..................................................................... 3-28
Establishing Communication Between the Analyzer and
Computer ................................................................................................... 3-39
Configurator Software Troubleshooting ............................................ 3-42
Analyzer Start-Up Diagnostic Checklist ........................................... 3-44
Sample System Leak Check .......................................................................... 3-46
Adjusting Analyzer Controls for Normal Operation ............................... 3-50
Setting Sample Response Time .............................................................. 3-50
Adjusting the Zero Gas Flow Rate ........................................................ 3-51
Normal Operation ........................................................................................... 3-52
Recording Initial Readings ..................................................................... 3-52
Recording PMT Signals ..................................................................... 3-52
Recording Initial Sample Response Time .......................................... 3-53
Analyzer Configuration ................................................................................. 3-54

CHAPTER 4 CONTROLLER / USER INTERFACE


Configuration Software Overview – Getting Started ................................ 4-2
Starting the Configurator Software ........................................................ 4-2
Closing the Configurator Software ......................................................... 4-4
General Tab .................................................................................................. 4-5
Modbus Serial / Modbus TCP Communication Setup ....................... 4-7
User Interface ............................................................................................ 4-10
Setting Up Your Screen ........................................................................... 4-10
View / Configure Analyzer Parameters and Data ............................... 4-11
Viewing Device Activities ....................................................................... 4-11
Saving Analyzer Configuration Parameters ........................................ 4-12
Restoring Analyzer Configuration Parameters ................................... 4-13
Modifying Analyzer Device Settings ........................................................... 4-15
Working From the Setup Tab .................................................................. 4-15
Saving Analyzer Configuration Parameters to an ASCII File .......... 4-18
Printing Analyzer Configuration Parameters ................................... 4-18
Refreshing Configuration Parameters ............................................... 4-19
Saving Configuration Parameters to EEPROM ............................... 4-19
Optical Bench ...................................................................................... 4-20
Cell/Miscellaneous (Compensations) Parameters ............................. 4-25
Temperature Control .......................................................................... 4-28
Optical Bench Temperature Control ........................................... 4-30
Measuring Cell Temperature Control ......................................... 4-31
Heated Acid Gas Probe Temperature Control (Optional) .......... 4-32
Output Setup ...................................................................................... 4-33
Sensors Setup ...................................................................................... 4-36
Modbus Settings ................................................................................. 4-40

Contents | v
Matrix ................................................................................................. 4-41
Analytical Parameters ........................................................................ 4-42
Analog Inputs ..................................................................................... 4-43
Setting Gas Calibration Parameters .................................................. 4-45
Alarm Setting and Stream Switch Parameters ................................. 4-51
Analyzer Information ......................................................................... 4-55
Status Tab ................................................................................................... 4-57
Analyzer Data Tab ..................................................................................... 4-62
Optical Bench Data Tab ........................................................................... 4-65
Scanning Data .................................................................................................. 4-67
Display Modes ........................................................................................... 4-68
Defining Scan Settings ............................................................................ 4-68
Starting a Scan ........................................................................................... 4-70
Stopping a Scan ........................................................................................ 4-70
Scheduling Scans ...................................................................................... 4-70
Working With Data Files ................................................................................ 4-72
Saving Data Files ....................................................................................... 4-72
Opening Data Files ................................................................................... 4-73
Scrolling Through Data Records ........................................................... 4-74
Converting Data Files .............................................................................. 4-74
Printing Data ............................................................................................. 4-74

CHAPTER 5 CALIBRATION
Manual Span Gas Calibration ......................................................................... 5-1
Analog Output Calibration .............................................................................. 5-5
Current Calibration .................................................................................... 5-5
Voltage Calibration ..................................................................................... 5-7

CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING


Safety Considerations ....................................................................................... 6-1
Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 6-2
Preventive Maintenance Schedule .......................................................... 6-2
Before Performing Maintenance .............................................................. 6-4
Detecting Plugs in the Sample System ................................................ 6-4
Preventing Plugs in the Sample System .............................................. 6-6
Changing Out Replaceable Parts ............................................................. 6-7
Measuring Cell Preventive Maintenance ............................................ 6-7
Disassembling and Cleaning the Measuring Cell ........................ 6-7
Replacing Parts and Reassembling the Measuring Cell ............. 6-11
Source Lamp Replacement ................................................................. 6-14
When Do the Source Lamps Need to be Replaced? .................... 6-14
About the Source Lamps .............................................................. 6-15
Replacing the Source Lamps ........................................................ 6-15
Auto-Setup .......................................................................................... 6-23
When is an Auto-Setup Required? .............................................. 6-23
When is an Auto-Setup Not Required? ...................................... 6-23

vi | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


PMT Level and PMT Balance ............................................................ 6-24
Auto-Setup Fault Message and Corrective Action ..................... 6-25
The Auto-Setup Sequence ............................................................ 6-25
Cancel Auto-Setup ....................................................................... 6-26
Manipulating the PMT Level and PMT Balance ....................... 6-27
Source Lamp Alignment .............................................................. 6-29
EEPROM Replacement ...................................................................... 6-31
Examining and Caring For the Flamepaths ....................................... 6-34
Upper/Lower Electronics Enclosure Flamepaths (Joining
Surfaces) ....................................................................................... 6-34
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting ................................................................. 6-36
Host Controller Board Error Conditions and Corrective Action .... 6-38
Microcontroller Board Error Conditions and Corrective Action .... 6-46
Analyzer Reset ........................................................................................... 6-52

CHAPTER 7 SERVICE & PARTS


Technical Support ............................................................................................. 7-1
Returning Equipment ...................................................................................... 7-2
Recommended Spare Parts .............................................................................. 7-4
Optical Bench/Sample System Spare Parts ............................................ 7-4
Spare Analyzer Fuses ................................................................................. 7-5
Printed Wiring Board Re-Ordering Part Numbers .............................. 7-5

APPENDIX A ADVANCED SOFTWARE OPERATION


Assigning Inputs to Channels for Display Modes ..................................... A-2
Modes of Operation ......................................................................................... A-3
Meter Mode ................................................................................................ A-3
Annunciator Mode .................................................................................... A-5
Trend Mode ................................................................................................. A-7
Tabular Mode .............................................................................................. A-8
Custom Modes ........................................................................................... A-9
Moving or Resizing a Window in Custom Mode ............................ A-10
Adding a Display Window in Custom Mode .................................... A-10
Deleting a Window in Custom Mode ............................................... A-10
Saving Custom Mode Files ................................................................ A-11
Opening Custom Mode Files ............................................................. A-11
Adding Custom Mode Files to the Mode Menu ............................... A-11
Saving Tabular Mode Files ............................................................................ A-12
About Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)............................................... A-13
Copying Magnitudes ......................................................................... A-13
Copying Channels .............................................................................. A-13
Setting Up the Display .................................................................................. A-14
Setting Alarms ................................................................................................. A-17

Contents | vii
APPENDIX B OPTIONS
Environmental Purge Option (Field Upgrade Available) ......................... B-1
Connection and Use ................................................................................. B-1
Pressure Compensation Option (Field Upgrade Available) ..................... B-3
Setting Up the Pressure Compensation Option.................................. B-3
Using the Pressure Compensation Option .......................................... B-5
Diagnostics Feature ............................................................................. B-5
Measuring Cells ................................................................................................ B-6
Loop-Powered Current Outputs (Field Upgrade Available) ................... B-6
Using the Loop-Powered Current Option ........................................... B-6
Gas Sensor Interface Options ........................................................................ B-7
Digital Input (Contact Interface) Option .................................................... B-7

APPENDIX C MODBUS COMMUNICATION INTERFACE


Overview ............................................................................................................ C-1
Holding Registers ............................................................................................. C-2

APPENDIX D DRAWINGS
Upper Enclosure Layout ............................................................................... D-2
Lower Enclosure Layout ................................................................................ D-3
Backpan Component Layout ........................................................................ D-4
AC Distribution PWB (P/N 100-1771) .......................................................... D-5
Customer I/O Board (P/N 100-1758) ............................................................. D-6
Customer Connections, I/O Board (120 VAC) ........................................... D-7
Host Controller Board (P/N 100-1757) ......................................................... D-8
Customer Connections, Host Controller Board (North America/
Europe) .............................................................................................................. D-9
RS-485 Port Terminations and Bias Options (Host Controller Board) ......D-10
Microcontroller Board (P/N 100-1781) ........................................................D-11
Micro-Interface Board (P/N 100-1898) ........................................................D-12
Optical Bench Service Electronics Board (P/N 100-1662) ....................... D-13
Conduit Entries and AC Power Connection Locations (North
America) ........................................................................................................... D-14
RS-232 Cable Communications Connections ........................................... D-15
Analyzer Wiring Diagram .............................................................................D-16
Inlet and Vent Flame Arrestor Locations for Environmental Purge
Option .............................................................................................................. D-17
PMT Buffer Board (P/N 100-0140-2) ............................................................D-18
Optical Bench Assembly (Model 932) .........................................................D-19
Solenoid Block (North American), 100-1892 ..............................................D-20
Solenoid Block (European), 100-1893 ..........................................................D-21

APPENDIX E CONVERSION FACTORS AND CALCULATIONS


Conversion Factors .......................................................................................... E-1
Prefixes ............................................................................................................... E-4

SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION

viii | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Safety Notes
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTES contained in this manual emphasize critical instructions
as follows:

An operating procedure which, if not strictly observed, may result in personal injury or
! environmental contamination.
WARNING

An operating procedure which, if not strictly observed, may result in damage to the equipment.
!
CAUTION

 Important information that should not be overlooked.


NOTE

Electrical Safety
High voltages are present in the analyzer housings. Always shut down power source(s) before
performing maintenance or troubleshooting. Only a qualified electrician should make electrical
connections and ground checks.

Any use of the equipment in a manner not specified by the manufacturer may impair the safety
protection originally provided by the equipment.

Grounding
Instrument grounding is mandatory. Performance specifications and safety protection are void if
instrument is operated from an improperly grounded power source.

! Verify ground continuity of all equipment before applying power.


WARNING

Contents | ix
Personnel and Equipment Safety Information
This section describes important safety information to avoid personal injury and damage to the
equipment while installing, operating, maintaining, or servicing the equipment. All safety
regulations, standards, and procedures at the analyzer location must be followed.

All personnel involved with the installation, start-up, operation, maintenance, service, or trou-
bleshooting of the analyzer must review and follow these Warnings and Cautions.

Warnings
Review and follow these Warnings to avoid personal injury or environmental contamination.

Always disconnect main AC power and/or alternate power sources (if used, i.e., for relay
! contacts) to the analyzer before opening any covers on the analyzer.
WARNING
If it is necessary to open the Upper/Lower Enclosures while the circuits are alive, test the area
for hazardous gases and proceed only when it is found to be safe. When the EEx d Electronics
Enclosures are open, take appropriate precautions to avoid electrical shock. Hazardous voltages
are present inside.

Any electrical connections, adjustments, or servicing of the analyzer should be performed only
! by properly trained and qualified personnel.
WARNING

All electrical connections, materials, and methods (plus all safety policies and procedures) must
be made in compliance with local wiring regulations and electrical code for the hazardous
location, and be approved by the Owner Company.

Before working on the sample system, purge the sample system with zero gas and confirm
! it is isolated (blocked in) from the process.
WARNING

Because ultraviolet radiation can harm your eyes, avoid direct viewing of the light emanating
! through the end window of the source lamp. If the source lamp must be viewed while energized,
WARNING
wear safety glasses that block ultraviolet radiation.

If the analyzer uses the optional Measuring Cell heater, take precautions to avoid burning
! yourself; the Measuring Cell and Heater Assembly are hot.
WARNING

x | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Cautions
Review and follow these Cautions to avoid damaging the equipment.

The electronic circuit boards and other static-sensitive components should be stored and
! transported in static-shielding carriers or packages.
CAUTION

For electrical-shock protection, the analyzer must be operated from a grounded power source
! that has a securely connected protective-ground contact.
CAUTION

If it becomes necessary to handle any of the electronic circuit boards, do not subject the boards
! to static discharge. The ideal solution is a static-safe work area. Since such areas typically are
CAUTION
not available at field installation sites, the use of a wrist strap connected directly to a ground is
recommended. If a wrist strap is not available, you should at the very least touch the metal
chassis (to ground yourself) before handling or touching the boards.

When handling the source lamps, it is very important not to touch the lamp windows because
! residual oils from the fingers will absorb ultraviolet light. The window is the flat surface at the
CAUTION
end of the narrow glass tube. The lamp assembly is fragile and should be handled with care.

Do not exceed the maximum working pressure rating of the sample system – 21 000 KPAG
! (3000 PSIG) without optional Filterblock Assembly – under any circumstances.
CAUTION
For analyzers using the optional Filterblock Assembly, do not exceed the maximum working
pressure rating of the sample system – 14 000 KPAG (2000 PSIG) with optional Filterblock
Assembly – under any circumstances.

If the Analyzer is equipped with the Environmental Purge option, clean air or nitrogen can be
! supplied to the inlet flame arrester at a pressure of 7–70 KPAG (1–10 PSIG).
CAUTION

Contents | xi
Warning Labels
These symbols may appear on the instrument in order to alert you of existing conditions.

PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR TERMINAL

(BORNIER DE L’ECRAN DE PROTECTION)

Schutzerde

CAUTION – Risk of electric shock

(ATTENTION – RISQUE DE DÉCHARGE ÉLECTRIQUE)

Achtung – Hochspannung Lebensgefahr

CAUTION – (Refer to accompanying documents)

(ATTENTION – SE RÉFERER AUX DOCUMENTS JOINTS)

Achtung (Beachten Sie beiliegende Dokumente)

CAUTION – Hot Surface

(ATTENTION – SURFACE CHAUDE)

Achtung – Heiße Oberfläche

xii | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Read and follow the recommendations in this section to avoid performance variations or
! damage to the internal circuits of this equipment when installed in harsh electrical environ-
CAUTION ments.

The various configurations of the Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers should not produce,
or fall victim to, electromagnetic disturbances as specified in the European Union’s EMC Direc-
tive. Strict compliance to the EMC Directive requires that certain installation techniques and
wiring practices are used to prevent or minimize erratic behavior of the Analyzer or its electronic
neighbors. Below are examples of the techniques and wiring practices to be followed.

In meeting the EMC requirements, the various Analyzer configurations described in this manual
rely heavily on the use of metallic shielded cables used to connect to the customer’s equipment
and power. Foil and braid shielded I/O and DC power cables are recommended for use in
otherwise unprotected situations. In addition, hard conduit, flexible conduit, and armor around
non-shielded wiring also provides excellent control of radio frequency disturbances. However,
use of these shielding techniques is effective only when the shielding element is connected to
the equipment chassis/earth ground at both ends of the cable run. This may cause ground loop
problems in some cases. These should be treated on a case-by-case basis. Disconnecting one
shield ground may not provide sufficient protection depending on the electronic environment.
Connecting one shield ground via a 0.1 microfarad ceramic capacitor is a technique allowing
high frequency shield bonding while avoiding the AC-ground metal connection. In the case of
shielded cables the drain wire or braid connection must be kept short. A two-inch connection
distance between the shield’s end and the nearest grounded chassis point, ground bar or termi-
nal is highly recommended. An even greater degree of shield performance can be achieved by
using metallic glands for shielded cable entry into metal enclosures. Expose enough of the braid/
foil/drain where it passes through the gland so that the shield materials can be wrapped back-
wards onto the cable jacket and captured inside the gland, and tightened up against the metal
interior.

Inductive loads connected to the low voltage “Alarm Contacts” are not recommended. However,
if this becomes a necessity, adhere to proper techniques and wiring practices. Install an appropri-
ate transient voltage suppression device (low voltage MOV, “Transzorb,” or R/C) as close as
possible to the inductive device to reduce the generation of transients. Do not run this type of
signal wiring along with other I/O or DC in the same shielded cable. Inductive load wiring must
be separated from other circuits in conduit by using an additional cable shield on the offending
cable.

In general, for optimum protection against high frequency transients and other disturbances, do
not allow installation of this Analyzer where its unshielded I/O and DC circuits are physically
mixed with AC mains or any other circuit that could induce transients into the Analyzer or the
overall system. Examples of electrical events and devices known for the generation of harmful
electromagnetic disturbances include motors, capacitor bank switching, storm related transients,
RF welding equipment, static, and walkie-talkies.

Contents | xiii
SPECIAL WARNINGS AND INFORMATION
EQUIPMENT USED IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
This Equipment is Suitable for Use in Hazardous Locations as follows:

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)


Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D, and/or Class I, Zone 1, Ex d IIB, T3.

ATEX (KEMA)
II 2 G EEx d IIB T3.

Explosion Hazard – Substitution of Components May Impair Suitability for Class I, Division 2.
!
WARNING

Risque d’explosion – La substitution de composants peut rendre ce materiel


! inacceptable pour les emplacements de Classe I, Division 2.
Avertissement

Explosion Hazard – Do Not Disconnect Equipment Unless Power Has Been Switched Off or
! the Area is Known to be Non-Hazardous.
WARNING

Risque d’explosion – Avant de déconnecter l’équipement, coupez le courant où vous


! assurez que l’emplacement est designé non dangereux.
Avertissement

All input and output wiring must be in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods (NEC
Sec 501.4(b) or CEC 18-152) and in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.

xiv | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


EC Declaration of Conformity

Contents | xv
WARRANTY AND CLAIMS
We warrant that any equipment of our own manufacture or manufactured for us pursuant to our specifica-
tions which shall not be, at the time of shipment thereof by or for us, free from defects in material or workman-
ship under normal use and service will be repaired or replaced (at our option) by us free of charge, provided
that written notice of such defect is received by us within twelve (12) months from date of shipment of
portable analyzers or within eighteen (18) months from date of shipment or twelve (12) months from date of
installation of permanent equipment, whichever period is shorter. All equipment requiring repair or replace-
ment under the warranty shall be returned to us at our factory, or at such other location as we may designate,
transportation prepaid. Such returned equipment shall be examined by us and if it is found to be defective as a
result of defective materials or workmanship, it shall be repaired or replaced as aforesaid. Our obligation does
not include the cost of furnishing any labor in connection with the installation of such repaired or replaced
equipment or parts thereof, nor does it include the responsibility or cost of transportation. In addition, instead
of repairing or replacing the equipment returned to us as aforesaid, we may, at our option, take back the
defective equipment, and refund in full settlement the purchase price thereof paid by Buyer.

Process photometric analyzers, process moisture analyzers, and sampling systems are warranted to perform the
intended measurement, only in the event that the customer has supplied, and AMETEK has accepted, valid
sample stream composition data, process conditions, and electrical area classification prior to order acknowl-
edgment. The photometric light sources are warranted for ninety (90) days from date of shipment. Resale items
warranty is limited to the transferable portion of the original equipment manufacturer’s warranty to AMETEK.
If you are returning equipment from outside Canada, a statement should appear on the documentation
accompanying the equipment being returned declaring that the goods being returned for repair are Canadian
goods, the name of the firm who purchased the goods, and the shipment date.

The warranty shall not apply to any equipment (or part thereof) which has been tampered with or altered after
leaving our control or which has been replaced by anyone except us, or which has been subject to misuse,
neglect, abuse or improper use. Misuse or abuse of the equipment, or any part thereof, shall be construed to
include, but shall not be limited to, damage by negligence, accident, fire or force of the elements. Improper use
or misapplications shall be construed to include improper or inadequate protection against shock, vibration,
high or low temperature, overpressure, excess voltage and the like, or operating the equipment with or in a
corrosive, explosive or combustible medium, unless the equipment is specifically designed for such service, or
exposure to any other service or environment of greater severity than that for which the equipment was
designed.

The warranty does not apply to used or secondhand equipment nor extend to anyone other than the original
purchaser from us. Should the Buyer’s technical staff require the on-site assistance of AMETEK’s agents or
employees for service calls covered by this warranty clause, the Buyer shall pay travel time plus actual travel
and living expenses.

THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN AND ACCEPTED IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION AND WARRANTIES OF FITNESS OR OF
MERCHANTABILITY OTHER THAN AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH HEREIN, AND OF ALL OTHER
OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON OUR PART. IN NO EVENT SHALL WE BE LIABLE UNDER THIS
WARRANTY OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT FOR ANY ANTICIPATED OR LOST
PROFITS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, TIME CHANGES OR ANY OTHER
LOSSES INCURRED BY THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OR ANY THIRD PARTY IN CONNECTION
WITH THE PURCHASE, INSTALLATION, REPAIR OR OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT, OR ANY PART
THEREOF COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE. WE MAKE NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OF FITNESS OR OF MER-
CHANTABILITY, AS TO ANY OTHER MANUFACTURER’S EQUIPMENT, WHETHER SOLD SEPA-
RATELY OR IN CONJUNCTION WITH EQUIPMENT OF OUR MANUFACTURE. WE DO NOT AUTHO-
RIZE ANY REPRESENTATIVE OR OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR US ANY LIABILITY IN CON-
NECTION WITH EQUIPMENT, OR ANY PART THEREOF, COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY.

xvi | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


OVERVIEW

The AMETEK Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers use photometric
analysis to monitor H2S levels in acid gas (and other) applications or other
high dewpoint applications. The microprocessor-based Model 931 and
Model 932 Analyzers minimize the complexity of these tasks and simpli-
fies operation of the analyzer system.

Theory of the Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


The Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers measure the absorbance of
ultraviolet light by a gas species. The Model 932 Analyzer analyzes a
maximum of six discrete wavelengths, while the Model 931 Analyzer
measures at two discrete wavelengths. The concentrations of the species
absorbing the light are determined from the relationships through appli-
cation of the ideal gas law in concert with the laws of Bouguer, Beer, and
Lambert law extended by using a system of linear equations. The mea-
surements can be viewed using a laptop computer connected to the
analyzer and running AMETEK’s Configurator Software.

The Beer-Lambert law, in combination with the ideal gas situation, states
that:

At a given wavelength the volumetric concentration of an


absorbing gas is directly proportional to the logarithm of
the transmittance and the temperature, and inversely pro-
portional to the Measuring Cell length and pressure.

The proportionality constant is determined according to the units chosen


for length, temperature, and pressure.

Overview | 1-1
Model 932 Multi-Gas UV Analyzers
In a situation where several species are absorbing light at several measur-
ing wavelengths, the total absorbance at any particular wavelength is the
sum of the absorbances for each of the species present. Using Beer’s law
for each measuring wavelength, a system of linear equations relating the
unknown concentration to the measured absorbance at each wavelength
is obtained. The total absorbance at each measuring wavelength is equal
to the proportionality constant multiplied by the molar absorptivity for
the first species times its concentration, plus the (molar absorptivity) factor
for the second species, times its concentration, and so on for all species
present in the Measuring Cell. Provided that there are more measuring
wavelengths than unknown concentrations, this system of linear equa-
tions is solved using standard methods of linear algebra.

Model 931 Single-Gas UV Analyzers


Thus, the absorbance, A, due to a single absorber is,

[ x ] kλ l P
A= ,
RT

where l is the path length of the light in the gas sample, [x] is the concen-
tration (mole percent [see Note]) of absorber x, kλ is the molar absorptivity
of absorber x at the measuring wavelength, λ, T and P are the temperature
and pressure of the gas sample, respectively, and R is the universal gas
constant.

 For an ideal gas, mole percent is equal to volume percent. At the


normal operating conditions of the analyzer, the real gas mixture
NOTE
deviates from ideal behavior by less than 0.5 percent.

For any given system at constant temperature and pressure, the equation
can be simplified to:

A= C kλ [ x ] ,

where C ≡ lP/RT is a constant depending only upon the system of units


employed. The concentration of the absorbing component may be deter-
mined from the absorption at the two measuring wavelengths.

1-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Features
Microprocessor-Based
The operation of the analyzer, calculations, and data manipulations
are all controlled by two on-board microprocessors.

Multicomponent Analysis (Model 932 Analyzers)


The availability of six discrete wavelengths enables either single-
component analysis or multicomponent analysis, with the capability
of eliminating interferences from other gas species.

Auto Zero
Automatically updates the analyzer zero. You can initiate the Auto-
Zero function on command using the Configurator Software, at user-
specified time intervals, or by a remote (potential free) contact clo-
sure.

Serial Communication
One RS-485 serial communications port is dedicated to customer data
acquisition. The port uses Modicon Modbus® protocol (optional).

A second serial communication channel is available for servicing or


reconfiguring of the analyzer using the System 200 Configurator
Software program running on a PC. The channel is jumper-selectable
between an RS-232 port and an RS-485 port. The RS-232 port is
intended for occasional connection while the RS-485 port is intended
for permanent connection.

Analog Outputs
There are eight independent output-signal channels. Four channels
consist of voltage outputs (1–5 V full-scale) while the other four are
isolated 4–20 mA outputs.

Temperature Control
The analyzer controls the temperature of up to three temperature-
controlled zones:
• Optical Bench
• Measuring Cell
• Heated Sample Probe (optional)
Independent over-temperature circuits protect the three zones.

Status Relays
There are five independent sets of SPDT (Form C) relay contacts (2 A,
250 V).

Overview | 1-3
Low Maintenance
The analyzer and sample system design reduces maintenance re-
quirements.

Heated Measuring Cell (optional)


For acid gas (and other) applications or other high dewpoint tem-
perature applications. For general and maintenance information
about optional about Heated Measuring Cells, refer to the “Supple-
mental Information” tab of this manual, or the Documentation
Package shipped with the analyzer.

Temperature-Controlled Enclosure (optional)


Used for applications requiring a temperature-controlled environ-
ment, to maintain the ambient temperature within 0–50 °C. The
Temperature-Controlled Enclosure uses cooling and heating systems
to maintain this ambient temperature range.

Pressure Compensation (optional)


See Appendix B – Options for more information about this feature.

Environmental Purge (optional)


See Appendix B – Options for more information about this feature.

Application
The principal application of the Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers is
the analysis of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) in acid gas and other process
streams. It can also be used to measure other UV-absorbing compounds.

Implementation
The Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers are comprised of (see Figure 1-1):

• Two ultraviolet light sources (source lamps)


• Source lamp filters
Model 931 Single-Species Analyzers
A filter block containing two wavelength-selective filters

Model 932 Multi-Species Analyzers


A filter wheel containing up to six interference filters
• Beam splitter
• Front-surfaced mirrors
• Gas measuring cell
• Two matched photodetectors

1-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Figure 1-1.
Analyzer analytical
block diagram.

Microcontroller Board and Host Controller Board


The operation of the analyzer is controlled by two microprocessors. One
is the Microcontroller board and is assigned to the Optical Bench inter-
face, data conversion, data preprocessing functions, and temperature
control of the Heated Measuring Cell (optional) and Optical Bench. The
other is the Host Controller board and is assigned to handling input/
output, temperature control of the Heated Sample Probe (optional, if
used), and final processing of data from the Microcontroller board. The
System 200 Configurator Software is a proprietary AMETEK software
program that is used to interface with the analyzer.

Overview | 1-5
Discrete Wavelengths
Model 932 Multi-Species Analyzers
To achieve measurements at discrete wavelengths, the locations of the
filters in the filter wheel and the placement of the source lamps are chosen
so that, at any given time, the photodetectors are exposed to light from
only one lamp and filter combination (i.e., a discrete wavelength).

For practical reasons related to timing and lamp control, two revolutions
of the filter wheel are required to collect a complete set of wavelength
data. During one revolution, consecutive pulses of light from Source
Lamp 1 arrive at the beam splitter. During the next revolution, consecutive
pulses of light arrive at the beam splitter from Source Lamp 2. Since the
nominal speed of the filter wheel is 400 RPM, pulses for any given wave-
length arrive at the beam splitter at a rate of 200 pulses per minute.

Model 931 Single-Species Analyzers:


The light sources in the Model 931 are modulated, such that only one
lamp is being pulsed at a time. The signals from the photodetectors are
demodulated such that light from only one lamp and filter combination is
considered at a time in the data analysis (i.e., a discrete wavelength is
used to measure the chemical species of interest).

For the Model 931 Analyzers measuring H2S in acid gas (and other)
applications, 228 nm is used to measure the H2S absorbance and 326 nm
is used for reference.

Model 932 Multi-Species and Model 931 Single-Species Analyzers:


As each pulse of light arrives, the beam splitter directs half the light to the
Reference photodetector and half through the gas sample to the Measure
photodetector. Because of the longer optical path length, light losses at the
mirrors, and light losses through the Measuring Cell windows, the
amount of light received by the Measure photodetector is less than that
received by the Reference photodetector, even when there are no absorb-
ers in the gas sample.

To balance this effect, a balance screen that filters 30 % of the light is


added to the Reference path. At each wavelength for any given analyzer,
these optical-path factors produce a constant difference between the
amounts of light received by the two photodetectors.

When absorbers are present in the gas sample, the amount of light received
by the Measure photodetector is reduced further. The magnitude of the
reduction is dependent upon the concentrations of the absorbers. Thus, for
each wavelength, the difference in the amounts of light received by the two
photodetectors (corrected for the optical-path factors) is used to determine
the absorbance of the gas sample. Then, the concentrations of the individual
absorbers (for which the analyzer is configured) are calculated.

1-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


About the Analyzer Sample System
The sample gas is transported to and from the analyzer by the process
stream pressure being higher than the vent pressure. For applications
using the optional Heated Sample Probe, an aspirator (within the probe)
is used to return the used sample gas to the process.

The major components of the sample system and their functions are
detailed below. The components listed below are for a variety of analyzer
configuration possibilities. Depending on your application, only some of
these components will be used. See Figure 1-2 for an example of a
Plumbing (Flow) Schematic configuration.

Component Function
Sample Probe Extends into the process stream to obtain a representative
sample. Can be heated or unheated. Heated probes return
used gas sample to the process stream.
Sample Shut-Off Valve Isolates the sample path from the process stream.
Heated Sample/Vent Lines
Optional – Used to keep the sample gas above the dewpoint
temperature (application-specific). Some applications vent
the used gas sample to a low pressure flare header (<0.5
PSIG).
Measuring Cell The Measuring Cell is a chamber of known length, with
optical-grade quartz windows, through which the radiation
beam passes through the gas sample. The windows are
sealed by means of o-rings and removable end caps.

The Measuring Cell can be unheated (typical) or heated


(optional) to keep the sample gas above the dewpoint. Other
variations of Measuring Cells are also available.
Sample Pressure Regulator
The pressure regulator is used to set the proper sample
pressure in the sample system.
Filter AMETEK recommends installing a coalescing or membrane
filter upstream of the Measuring Cell.
Zero Solenoid The zero solenoid allows zero gas to flush the sample
system during the auto-zero process.
Flow Indicator Used to indicate that when the float is in the centre, the
sample flow is approximately 2.5 L/min (5 SCFH).
Filterblock Assembly Optional – Used to filter out small quantities of liquids such
as water, glycols, amines, alcohols, or compressor oils.
Heated Sample Probe Optional – Used to maintain the temperature of the Sample
Probe Assembly above the sample dewpoint temperature.
Includes an aspirator which provides suction to move the
sample gas through the sample path. Refer to the Heated
Acid Gas Sample Probe Installation & Maintenance Guide for
complete details.

Overview | 1-7
LEGEND

Figure 1-2.
Plumbing schematic
(European).

Figure 1-2 illustrates an example of a Plumbing (Flow) Schematic


 configuration for a European installation – actual layout may differ
NOTE
for your application.

To view the schematic for your application, refer to the customer-


specific drawings in the “Supplemental Information” tab of this
manual or the Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

1-8 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Relays

Status Relays
The Customer I/O board contains three independent relays that indicate
the operational status of the analyzer. Each relay provides a set of SPDT
(form C) dry (potential free) contacts. The relays are configured for fail-
safe operation (i.e., energized for the non-alarm condition). Each relay
also has an associated green LED on the Customer I/O board, which
remains on steady to indicate a non-alarm (normal operating) condition.

• The Fault relay indicates that an error has been detected by the built-
in diagnostics system. If this relay is de-energized, the green LED
(D404) will turn off to indicate the analyzer requires service. If the
relay is configured to latch (default) it will not clear unless the user
manually resets the alarm; otherwise, it will reset automatically upon
correction of the fault.

• The Warning relay indicates that the analyzer’s built-in diagnostics


has detected a warning alarm condition, that the analyzer is not
operating under normal automatic control, or that the analyzer is
performing a gas or analog output calibration. If this relay is de-
energized, the green LED (D405) will turn off to indicate the analyzer
requires attention.

• The Alarm Valid relay indicates whether information from the Con-
centration 1 and Concentration 2 relays is valid or whether the
analyzer is capable of alarming. The contacts automatically change
state upon correction of the condition which caused the alarm. If this
relay is de-energized, the green LED (D406) will turn off to indicate
there is a problem.

Overview | 1-9
Alarm Relays
There are two independent relays, which indicate that the gas concentra-
tion has exceeded the alarm On-Threshold or Off-Threshold setpoint.
Each relay provides a set of SPDT (Form C), dry (potential free) contacts.
Each relay has an associated red LED (D407 and D408 on the Customer
I/O board), which lights to indicate an alarm condition.

If values are assigned to these alarm relays, they are used for concentra-
tion alarms; if there are no values assigned to either of these relays, they
become stream status relays. The relay contacts for each alarm will remain
in the alarm state after the concentration returns to normal if the relay
configuration is set to be latching (default). It is possible to configure the
concentration alarm to be non-latching if desired. Refer to “Alarm Setting
and Stream Switching Parameters” in Chapter 4 for more information.

• The Concentration 1 relay indicates that the assigned species has


exceeded the Alarm 1 On-Threshold or Off-Threshold setpoint.

If there is no value (N/A, see Note) assigned to this relay it becomes


the Stream A status relay (when energized).

• The Concentration 2 relay indicates that the assigned species has


exceeded the Alarm 2 On-Threshold or Off-Threshold setpoint.

If there is no value (N/A, see Note) assigned to this relay it becomes


the Stream B status relay (when energized).

 If N/A is selected from Result Assignment on the Alarm Setting


and Stream Switch Parameters dialog box of the System 200
NOTE
Configurator Software, the Concentration 1 and Concentration 2
relays are used for Stream A and Stream B, respectively.

Solid State Relays


Solid state relays control DC power of up to three solenoids (labeled A, B,
and Z) that can be used by Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers. Digital
control lines are used to turn these solid-state relays on and off. Each
control line has an associated red LED (D411, D410, D409) on the Cus-
tomer I/O board, which turns on to indicate that the solid state relay has
switched and the solenoid is activated. If all the LEDs are turned off, this
indicates that the analyzer’s Flow Control mode is in Shut-in/off mode.

1-10 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


SPECIFICATIONS

The Specifications listed in this chapter apply to both Model 931 and
Model 932 Analyzers, except where noted.

Methodology
Model 931 Analyzers:
Dual wavelength, high resolution, non-dispersive UV.

Model 932 Analyzers:


Multi-wavelength, high resolution, non-dispersive UV.

Standard Range Measuring Cell


Maximum ranges are based on sample (expressed in cm). Minimum ranges
are 1/25 of maximum ranges for standard Measuring Cells (5 cm to 81.2 cm)
and 1/8 for high concentration Measuring Cells (1 mm to 10 mm).

Model 931 Analyzers:


H2S H2S Range @ 228 nm = 30 % H2S / (Cell length), to a minimum of
200 PPM and a maximum of 100 %.
SO2 SO2 Range = 15 % SO2 / (Cell length), to a minimum of 100 PPM

Model 932 Analyzers:


SO2 SO2 Range = 20 % SO2 / (Cell length), to a minimum of 100 PPM
NO NO Range = 6 % NO / (Cell length), to a minimum of 60 PPM
NO2 NO2 Range = 30 % NO2 / (Cell length), to a minimum of 150 PPM
COS COS Range = 50 % COS / (Cell length), to a minimum of 400 PPM
H2S H2S Range @ 228 nm = 20 % H2S / (Cell length), to a minimum of
200 PPM
H2S Range @ 214 nm = 4 % H2S / (Cell length), to a minimum of
60 PPM
NH3 NH3 Range = 10 % NH3 / (Cell length), to a minimum of 200 PPM

Specifications | 2-1
Response Time
90 % response in 30 seconds or less (excluding sample system)

Measurement Accuracy
± 1.0 % full-scale of standard ranges (excluding drift and temperature
effects). Accuracy is determined by comparing analyzer response to a
known standard gas after a calibration has been performed.

Repeatability
<± 0.5 % full-scale of standard ranges

Calibration
Calibration gases in nitrogen

Linearity
Typically <± 1.0 % of reading for H2S

Stability
Noise: <0.2 % full-scale of standard ranges

Cross-Talk
Typically better than 1 % cross-interference between species used
(application-specific).

Cross-talk adjustments should be made by factory-trained service


 personnel only.
NOTE

Temperature Drift
H2S @ 228 nm = (40 PPM / Cell length) / °C at atmospheric pressure

2-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


24-Hour Zero Drift
H2S (Heated or Unheated Cell)
-2.0 % of customer full-scale for the Measuring Cell size (application-
specific), with Auto-Zero disabled.

Analog Outputs
Up to four isolated 4–20 mA DC current outputs, loop-powered or self-
powered.
Four non-isolated voltage outputs, 1–5 VDC full-scale.

Digital Communication
One RS-485 port (for Modicon Modbus® protocol).
One RS-232 port (or optional RS-485) for service diagnostics.
Explosion-Proof Serial Communication Port on Lower Enclosure.

Electrical Requirements

Maximum Start-Up Power


All values do not include Sample/Vent Line and Sample Gas Probe power
requirements.

Without optional Measuring Cell heater or Heated Acid Gas Probe:


210 W maximum start-up with continuous average, depending on ambi-
ent temperature.

With optional Measuring Cell heater:


310 W

With optional Heated Acid Gas Probe and Measuring Cell heater:
<500 W

Specifications | 2-3
Maximum Current / Supply Voltage
ATEX/Hazardous Locations:
120 ± 10 % VAC, 50–60 Hz, 3 A Maximum
240 ± 10 % VAC, 50–60 Hz, 2 A Maximum

CSA:
104–132 VAC, 47–63 Hz, 3 A Maximum
207–264 VAC, 47–63 Hz, 2 A Maximum

Status Relay Contacts


250 VDC, 2 A Maximum

Digital Input Signals


For Auto-Cal and Alarm Enable/Clear
0–24 VDC, 30 VDC Maximum

Output Signal
4–20 mA DC, 30 VDC Maximum

Typical Flow
2.5 L/minute (5 SCFH)

Ambient Limits

Temperature
From 0–50 °C (32–122 °F).
For applications using unheated Measuring Cells, the surrounding ambi-
ent temperature of the analyzer must be at least 5 °C above the sample
dew point temperature. In high dewpoint applications, a heated Measur-
ing Cell and heat-traced Sample/Vent Lines must be used to prevent
condensation of liquids in the sample system.

Humidity
0–95 % RH

Maximum Altitude
2000 m

2-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Zero Gas
UHP nitrogen, or Instrument Air for non-flammable streams.

Sample Transport
Application dependent.

Sample Pressure Requirement (Optional)


Without optional Filterblock Assembly:
840–20,700 KPAG (120–3000 PSIG)

With optional Filterblock Assembly:


840–13,790 KPAG (120–2000 PSIG)

 Refer to Article 3, Paragraph 3 in the Pressure Equipment Directive


document titled “Directive 97/23/EC of the European Parliament and
NOTE
of the Council.”

Instrument Air Requirements


Air Quality: As per ANSI/ISA S7.0.01 (1996) Quality Standard for
Instrument Air.

Pressure Compensation (Optional)


Pressure Compensation is available as an option. Refer to Appendix B for
information about this option.

Temperature Control
Independent control of up to three temperature-controlled zones:

• Optical Bench

• Measuring Cell

• Heated Sample Probe (optional, for acid gas or other applications)

Specifications | 2-5
Physical Dimensions (on Backpan)
Height: 1185 mm (46.65")

Width: 780 mm (30.7")

Depth: 232 mm (9.1")

Weight: Approximately 146 kg (320 lb), entire system and


backpan only (may vary, depending on system).

Approvals and Certifications


The Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers are certified Pollution Degree 2
(normally nonconductive environmental pollution occurs with occasional
condensation) and Installation Category II (local level transients, less than
those found at power distribution level).

Other certifications and approvals include:

NEC/CSA: Class I, Zone 1 (Division 1), Groups C&D, AEx d IIB T3


GOST: 1ExdIIBT3
Complies with all relevant European Directives,
GOST Pattern Approval
ATEX (KEMA): II 2 G EEx d IIB T3
PED: Pressure Equipment Directive (97/23/EC)
Article 3, Paragraph 3

Hydrogen Sensor (Optional)

Accuracy
± 5.0 % full-scale of standard ranges. Accuracy is based on a full-scale of
10 % H2 in a Scot Contactor Overhead application, where the sensor is in
a temperature-controlled oven.

Cross-Talk on Hydrogen
± 1.3 % of H2 full-scale. This is the RMS error in the reading due to CO2,
H2O, and pressure effects.

Cross-talk of CO2 is 0.75 %, H2O is 0.5 %, and pressure is 1 % of the H2


full-scale.

2-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


ATEX (CENELEC) Certificate and Analyzer Marking
For installation sites with potentially explosive atmospheres that require
ATEX certification, AMETEK’s ATEX certificate for the Model 931 and
Model 932 Analyzers is included in the following pages.

Specifications | 2-7
2-8 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers
ATEX-certified Model 931 Analyzers are marked with the label shown
below.

0344

PROCESS INSTRUMENTS II 2 G

Western Research Model 931 Analyzer


Certificate No: KEMA 02ATEX2247, EEx d IIB T3 (T amb. 0°C...50°C)
Year. _______
Serial No. __________________

Caution
Do not open when an explosive gas atmosphere is present.

Power Dissipation Input


<310W 120VAC 50/60Hz 3A max.
<310W 240VAC 50/60Hz 2A max.

ATEX-certified Model 932 Analyzers are marked with the label shown
below.

0344

PROCESS INSTRUMENTS II 2 G

Western Research Model 932 Analyzer


Certificate No: KEMA 02ATEX2247, EEx d IIB T3 (T amb. 0°C...50°C)
Year. _______
Serial No. __________________

Caution
Do not open when an explosive gas atmosphere is present.

Power Dissipation Input


<310W 120VAC 50/60Hz 3A max.
<310W 240VAC 50/60Hz 2A max.

Specifications | 2-9
CSA Certificate and Analyzer Marking
For installation sites that require CSA certification, AMETEK’s CSA certifi-
cate for the Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers is included in the follow-
ing pages.

2-10 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Specifications | 2-11
2-12 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers
CSA-certified Model 931 Analyzers are marked with the label shown
below.

PROCESS INSTRUMENTS

Western Research Model: 931 ANALYZER


SN:

___104-132Vac, 3A ___207-264 Vac, 2A, 47-63 Hz, <500W


CLASS I, GROUPS C & D
CLASS I ZONE 1 Ex d IIB T3, AEx d IIB T3
Tamb. +50°C

Caution
Open circuit before removing cover.

CSA-certified Model 932 Analyzers are marked with the label shown
below.

PROCESS INSTRUMENTS

Western Research Model: 932 ANALYZER


SN:

___104-132Vac, 3A ___207-264 Vac, 2A, 47-63 Hz, <500W


CLASS I, GROUPS C & D
CLASS I ZONE 1 Ex d IIB T3, AEx d IIB T3
Tamb. +50°C

Caution
Open circuit before removing cover.

Specifications | 2-13
This page intentionally left blank.

2-14 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


INSTALLATION AND START-UP

This chapter shows you how to install and start up the Model 931 and
Model 932 UV Analyzers. It includes:

• Where to find safety information in this guide before working with


the analyzer.

• Pre-installation requirements

• Installation of mechanical components

• Electrical installation

• Installing the System 200 Configurator Software

• Start-up and verification

• Sampling system leak check

• Adjusting analyzer controls for normal operation

• Normal operation

• Analyzer configuration

The installation of the analyzer must be in accordance with all of


! the user and local regulatory standards and procedures. There are
WARNING
no operator-serviceable components inside the analyzer. Refer
servicing to qualified personnel.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-1


Safety Considerations
Under normal operating conditions, dangerous concentrations of H2S
and other toxic gases from the process may be present within the sample
system. The sample system is defined as all components in the analyzer
system through which the process gas passes.

Before installing and powering it up the Model 931 or Model 932


 UV Analyzer, review and follow all safety information under
NOTE “Personnel and Equipment Safety Information” following the Table
of Contents. This information describes procedures to follow to
avoid personal injury and/or damage to the equipment. All regula-
tory agency and personnel safety procedures for your jurisdic-
tion must be followed.

3-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Pre-Installation Requirements

Storage Prior to Installation


If the analyzer and its Optical Bench Assembly are stored for any period
of time prior to installation, store the equipment in an environment where
it is not subject to dripping liquids, splashing liquids, corrosive gases, high
humidity, or excessive heat or cold.

Uncrating and Inspection


The analyzer, along with its associated sample system, is shipped pre-
mounted on a backpan and in a crate. Upon receiving the analyzer,
remove it from its shipping crate and check its exterior for damage. Open
the Upper and Lower Enclosure (48 hex-socket screws) and check that
all of the components and wiring within the Electronics Enclosures are
secure and there is no physical damage.

Avoid damaging the analyzer’s piping and instrumentation by


! lifting it out of its shipping crate using only its backpan. DO NOT
CAUTION
use any piping or instrument as a handle for lifting.

The analyzer and its backpan weighs approximately 146 kg (320 lb).
! Use caution when lifting it from its crate.
WARNING

After the inspection, replace and tighten at least one hex screw for
! each enclosure. This will keep the enclosures secure and will prevent
CAUTION damage to the joining surfaces (flamepaths) during installation.

The Optical Bench Assembly is shipped in a separate box. Remove the


shipping crate and check it for any physical damage.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-3


General Installation Information
The electronic circuit boards and other static-sensitive components
! should be stored and transported in static-shielding carriers or
CAUTION
packages.

When handling the source lamps, it is very important not to touch the
! lamp windows because residual oils from the fingers will absorb
CAUTION
ultraviolet light. The window is the flat surface at the end of the
narrow glass tube. The lamp assembly is fragile and should be handled
with care.

• Metric fasteners are used throughout the analyzer assembly. 2 mm,


2.5 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm, and 8 mm hexagonal wrenches are
required for servicing the analyzer.
• The torque specification for fastening M6 screws is 4.0 ± 0.7 Nm
(36 ±9 in-lb). The torque specification for fastening M10 screws is 9.0
±1.0 Nm (80 ± 9 in-lb).

Tools and Equipment Required


To install the analyzer, you need the following tools, equipment, and supplies:
• Set of open-end wrenches for fittings.
• Set of metric hexagonal wrenches.
• Set of metric ball drivers.
• Wire Cutters, strippers, and crimpers.
• Flat blade instrument screwdriver.
• Electric Drill.
• Wrist Strap (for grounding).
• Detergent-based leak detector (Snoop® or another suitable leak
detection agent is permissible).
• A coalescing or membrane filter (if one is not supplied as part of the
sample system) to be installed upstream of the Measuring Cell.
• One explosion-proof power-disconnect switch (breaker), rated for at
least 250 VAC, 4 A and certified for the hazardous location. For safety
reasons during maintenance, this switch allows the main power to be
disconnected from the analyzer. This switch is to be supplied by the
customer/end user.
• Supply of 1/4" 316 stainless steel tubing for the Sample, Vent, and
Zero/Aspirator Drive Gas lines.
• Applications that return the sample gas to the process stream through a
Heated Sample Probe will also require tubing for Aspirator Air.

3-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Installing the Mechanical Components
Follow the installation procedures in this chapter under the sections
“Mounting the Analyzer” and “Installing the Optical Bench.”

Do not mount the Optical Bench in the EEx d Upper Enclosure until
! after the analyzer has been mounted in its designated location.
CAUTION

Mounting the Analyzer


The analyzer system comes mounted on a backpan. See Figure 3-1
(North American style) for the backpan and mounting hole locations and
dimensions, plus necessary clearances on all sides that are required for
service. For European-style or other applications, refer to customer-
specific drawings in the “Supplemental Information” tab of this manual
or the Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

Location and Environment

The Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers are designed for indoor opera-
tion (Pollution Degree 2) so they must be shielded from the elements.
The entire analyzer system (and its backpan) can be mounted directly on
a wall inside a building, in a specially designed cabinet, or in a custom-
built shelter. In all cases, the analyzer system must be installed indoors to
ensure it is shielded from harsh environmental elements.

Regardless of which installation method is used, be sure to install the


 analyzer in a location that is as free as possible from vibrations.
NOTE

The surrounding ambient temperature of the analyzer must be between


0 °C and 50 °C (32 °F and 122 °F). In high dewpoint applications, a heated
Measuring Cell and heat-traced Sample/Vent Lines must be used to
prevent condensation of liquids in the sample system. If the analyzer
system is mounted within an AMETEK-designed shelter, these conditions
are taken into consideration in the design of shelter.

Locate the analyzer at an accessible location as close to the sample point


as possible in order to obtain minimum response time and, if the sample
line must be heated, minimize the heating requirements.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-5


PROCESS INSTRUMENTS

SERIA L COMM UN ICATIONS PORT


D O NOT OPEN IF A HAZA RD OUS
GAS ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT

MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN

Figure 3-1.
Analyzer backpan
dimensions (North
American).

 Figure 3-1 represents an example of a North American-style backpan


component layout, shown with a heated Cell. For details about your
NOTE
analyzer, refer to the “Supplemental Information” tab of this manual
or the Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

3-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Installing the Optical Bench Assembly
Refer to the drawings in this section for assistance in identifying the
locations of the hardware components and cable connectors.

All electrical connections to the Optical Bench Assembly are made via
pre-wired connector plugs. No hard wiring is required.

Ensure there is no power being supplied to the analyzer during the


! installation of the Optical Bench Assembly.
WARNING

While installing the Optical Bench Assembly in the EEx d Upper


! Enclosure, take care not to damage the mating areas (flamepath) of the
CAUTION EEx d Upper Enclosure.

To mount the Optical Bench Assembly:

1. Connect the Optical Bench AC power line to TB100 on the Optical


Bench Service Electronics board (see Figure 3-2 for location of
board).

2. Locate the cam pins, which are part of the Optical Bench Mount
(Figure 3-2). Confirm that the grooved lines in the cam pins are
facing inward.

 The cam pins must stay aligned while the Optical Bench Assembly
is being mounted in the Upper Enclosure. The lined groove on the
NOTE
head of the cam pin must stay parallel to the Measuring Cell until
the Optical Bench Assembly is in place.

3. Attach the Optical Bench Assembly by fitting the Optical Bench


mount over the Cell Window housing mount.

4. Rotate the lower cam pin counter-clockwise and the upper cam pin
clockwise until they are tight.

5. Connect the green/yellow ground wire from the interior of the


Upper Enclosure (via the disconnect terminals) to the green/yellow
wire connected to the Optical Bench Assembly.

6. Connect the Micro-Interface AC power line to J200 on the Micro-


Interface board (see Figure 3-2 for location of board).

Installation & Start-Up | 3-7


LOOSE CLAMPED

OPTICAL BENCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Figure 3-2.
Upper Enclosure
(Model 932) layout and
cam pin locations.

 Figure 3-2 illustrates a Model 932 Optical Bench Assembly. However,


the installation procedure is the same for Model 931 analyzers.
NOTE

7. Connect the DC power line to J103 on the Micro-Interface board.

8. Connect the RS-422 communication line to J104 on the Micro-


Interface board.

9. Connect the Measuring Cell RTD to J300 on the Micro-Interface board.

Use a soft, nonabrasive cloth to gently clean the mating areas


! (flamepath) of the Upper Enclosure and its door. Close the door and
CAUTION
replace at least one of the M10 screws while completing the instal-
lation. This will ensure the flamepath is not inadvertently damaged.

3-8 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Installing the Sample System
The analyzer is supplied with fittings for Sample Line, Vent Line, and
Zero/Aspirator Drive Gas connections (see Figure 3-3). Depending on the
application, the Sample Inlet and Vent Outlet fittings are located on the
backpan or on the Measuring Cell. Refer to the drawings for appropriate
fitting sizes. The Sample and Vent lines (heated optional) are supplied by
customer.

 Drawings of the sample system components that make up your


analyzer system are included in the “Supplemental Information” tab
NOTE
of this manual, and in the Documentation Package shipped with the
analyzer. If parts of the sample system are not supplied by
AMETEK, refer to the appropriate instructions and drawings shipped
with those components.

All regulatory agency, personnel safety procedures, and installa-


! tion/removal procedures must be followed during the installation/
WARNING removal of the sample system components. A breathing apparatus
must be worn when installing/removing equipment from the
sample gas extraction point. The process stream is under positive
pressure, and injury or death from inhaling toxic gases from the
process stream duct could result from attempting to install/remove
equipment without the use of a breathing apparatus.

Ensure all appropriate fuses are removed before terminating any


! wiring. Refer to the Fuse Legend on the inside of the analyzer’s
WARNING Lower Enclosure for locations of these fuses.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-9


PROCESS INSTRUMENTS

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT


DO NOT OPEN IF A HAZARDOUS
GAS ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT

MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN


8 7 6 5
12
9

11 10

1 2 3 4
SOLENOID BLOCK DETAIL

Figure 3-3.
Overall component
layout (North American).

 Figure 3-3 represents an example of a North American style


backpan component layout. For details about your analyzer, refer
NOTE
to the customer-specific drawings in the “Supplemental Informa-
tion” tab of this manual or the Documentation Package shipped
with the analyzer.

3-10 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Installing the Sample Probe

If the Sample Probe is supplied by AMETEK, refer to appropriate draw-


ings in the “Supplemental Information” tab of this manual, or the Docu-
mentation Package shipped with the analyzer. These drawings include
important information to follow while installing the probe.

For installation procedures, refer to the Heated Acid Gas Sample Probe
Installation & Maintenance Guide.

Installing the Sample and Vent Lines

The Sample and Vent Lines can be supplied by AMETEK or by the cus-
tomer. The tubing must be 1/4" 316 stainless steel tubing with appropriate
1/4" NPT connectors. Applications that used AMETEK’s Heated Sample
Probe will return the used sample gas to the process stream through the
probe. Alternate configurations are to disperse the used sample gas to a
low pressure flare header or vent pipe to atmosphere.

Refer to the Analyzer Plumbing Schematic and other related drawings for
important installation information. These drawings are located in the
“Supplemental Information” tab of this manual, and in the Documenta-
tion Package shipped with the analyzer.

 AMETEK recommends installing a coalescing or membrane filter


upstream of the Measuring Cell (if one is not supplied as part of the
NOTE
sample system).

 The vent line should vent to a low pressure (<0.5 PSIG) flare header.
NOTE

Installation & Start-Up | 3-11


Installing the Zero/Aspirator Drive Gas Line

The Zero/Aspirator gas line is supplied by the customer. The tubing must
be 1/4" 316 stainless steel tubing with appropriate 1/4" NPT connectors.
Refer to system drawings for Zero/Aspirator Drive Gas pressure settings
for your application.

The customer can choose between supplying a cylinder of N2, regulator,


and line, a regulated Instrument Air supply, or a regulated nitrogen
supply.

 If using Instrument Air, it must meet the ANSI/ISA S7.0.01 (1996)


specifications at all times. If the Instrument Air cannot meet these
NOTE
requirements, an inlet filter system must be installed.

To install the Zero/Aspirator gas line:

1. Route the tubing from the supply source to the analyzer.

2. Blow down (purge) the line to remove any liquids or particulate that
may be present in it line before connecting it to the analyzer.

3. Connect the line to the Zero/Aspirator Drive Gas Inlet on the ana-
lyzer.

4. Connect the Zero Gas air line to the Zero Gas cylinder or the Instru-
ment Air line to the Instrument Air supply.

3-12 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Electrical Installation
The analog input/output signals, alarm relay contacts, and AC power
requirements are specific to each analyzer installation. Drawings that
show the termination points are included in the “Supplemental Informa-
tion” tab of this manual, or in the Documentation Package shipped with
the analyzer.

Where required, certified EEx d cable glands must be used and each
! unused cable entry port must be plugged with a certified EEx d plug.
WARNING

For AC electrical supply cable and conduit requirements, refer to and


comply with local wiring regulations and electrical codes for the
hazardous location.

Refer to the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) page in the contents


 section of this manual for information that discusses the EMC Directive
NOTE regarding techniques and wiring practices to be followed.

To maintain EMC compliance in European installations, AMETEK


recommends using metal glands and shielded cable (shielded with at
least 85 % coverage) for both power and signal cable connections.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-13


Input/Output Signal Connections
The following inputs/outputs are supplied with the analyzer as standard:

• One digital input for remote calibration,

• One digital input for Alarm Enable/Disable – Concentration Alarms


(this input must be terminated with a jumper or closed contact for
the alarms to be enabled),

• Four (4) non-isolated voltage outputs, and

• One isolated current output signals (three additional current outputs


available upon request).

The analog input/output (and alarm relay) terminations are made on


the Customer I/O board (see Figure 3-4), located in the Lower Enclo-
sure.

 Figure 3-4 is an example of a 120 VAC style Customer Connections


drawing. For a customer-specific drawing for your application,
NOTE
refer to the “Supplemental Information” tab of this manual or the
Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

European Installations only:


Signal wires, contained within cable that is approved locally for the
hazardous location, enter the EEx d Lower Enclosure through one of the
Signal Cable Entries on the bottom of the EEx d Lower Enclosure.

Optional Interface Capabilities

The analyzer has optional interface capabilities for up to three additional


gas sensors. One extra digital input is also available (example, for stream
switching applications). These interfaces are located on the Micro-
Interface board. For details, refer to “Gas Sensor Interface Options” and
“Digital Input (Contact Interface) Option” in Appendix B – Options.

3-14 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


I/O BOARD CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS

120VAC POWER TERMINATIONS

OR

OR

Figure 3-4.
Customer Connections,
I/O board (120 VAC
applications), example
only.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-15


Digital Communication

The digital communication port configurations are made on the Host


Controller board. Refer to Figures 3-5 and 3-6 for communication/termi-
nation options and jumper (JP) locations/settings.

Hardware Configuration (Modbus Serial Communication)

The Explosion-Proof Digital (Local Service) Communications Port (9-pin


D-sub connector), configured as RS-232, is located on the front of the
Lower Enclosure (see Figure 3-3). The port is principally intended as a
temporary connection for configuring and servicing the analyzer while
communicating with the analyzer via the AMETEK System 200
Configurator Software.

Hazardous Locations:
! Before attempting to access the Digital Communications Port, test the area for
WARNING
hazardous gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-


tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure, do not connect the
computer’s serial cable to the analyzer’s serial communication port,
and do not power up the laptop computer if there is an explosive gas
atmosphere present.

There are also two other serial port connections available for permanent
connection: Remote Service Port and Customer Data Acquisition Port
(Modbus communications), both RS-485.

To configure either port, refer to “Remote Service Port/Local Service Port


Configurations” (and “Remote Service Port RS-485, Full/Half Duplex,” if
using the Remote Service Port) or “Customer Data Acquisition Port RS-485,
Full/Half Duplex” in the following pages. The jumpers for these service
ports are located on the Host Controller board (see Figures 3-5 and 3-6).
Remote Service Port / Local Service Port Configurations
Set these jumpers to
To configure the analyzer for: these positions:

JP300 = 1-2
Local Service Port RS-232 or Modem JP301 = 1-2
JP302 = 1-2

JP300 = 2-3
Remote Service Port RS-485 JP301 = 2-3
(* See Note.) JP302 = 2-3

*Note: Requires additional configuration, discussed under “Remote


Service Port RS-485, Full/Half Duplex” configurations.

3-16 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


HC BOARD CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS

OR

OR

Figure 3-5.
Customer Connections,
Host Controller board.

If using the Remote Service Port (RS-485), you must configure it for Full-
Duplex (4-Wire) or Half-Duplex (2-Wire), as shown below in the “Remote
Service Port RS-485, Full/Half Duplex” configuration, and Figures 3-5/3-6.

 The RS-485 Remote Service Port can also be used for customer
service, but not both at the same time as the RS-232 Digital Commu-
NOTE
nications Port.

If the system is configured for RS-485 2-wire communication using


the System 200 Configurator Software, a RS-485-to-RS-232
convertor – which uses the Automatic Transmit Enable (or Send
Data Control) function – must be used.

Remote Service Port RS-485, Full / Half Duplex


(Service RS-485 JP304)
To configure Set jumper JP304 to
the analyzer for: this position:

Full-Duplex (4-Wire) 1-2

Half-Duplex (2-Wire) 2-3

Installation & Start-Up | 3-17


The Customer Data Acquisition Port (Modbus Communication) is config-
ured as RS-485 and is accessed via J302 on the Host Controller board inside
the Lower Enclosure. This line can be configured as Full-Duplex (4-Wire) or
Half-Duplex (2-Wire), as shown below in the “Customer Data Acquisition
Port RS-485, Full/Half Duplex” configuration, and Figures 3-5/3-6.

 If your system is configured to communicate through the RS-485


Customer Data Acquisition Port (Modbus Communication), you
NOTE
cannot communicate with the analyzer through the RS-232 Digital
Communications Port (on the front of the Lower Enclosure) unless
you stop polling from the Customer Data Acquisition Port.

Customer Data Acquisition Port RS-485, Full / Half Duplex


(Customer RS-485 JP303)
To configure Set jumper JP303 to
the analyzer for: this position:

Full-Duplex (4-Wire) 1-2

Half-Duplex (2-Wire) 2-3

If it is possible to do so during installation, cable the terminal connec-


tions into a nonhazardous location. Ensure that all unused cable/conduit
entries to the enclosures are closed with appropriately certified plugs for
the hazardous location.

Use a soft, nonabrasive cloth to gently clean the mating areas


! (flamepath) of the Upper and Lower Enclosures before closing them.
CAUTION

3-18 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Figure 3-6.
Host Controller board
(P/N 100-1757, Rev. B).

Installation & Start-Up | 3-19


Hardware Configuration (Modbus TCP Communication)

If using Modbus TCP to communicate with the analyzer (via the


AMETEK System 200 Configurator Software), a TCP module must be
installed and set up before communication between the computer and
analyzer can be established. This type of communication connection can
be used for configuring and servicing the analyzer, without the use of a
serial cable.

For details about this type of communication, contact your AMETEK


representative.

Hazardous Locations:
! Do not power up the laptop computer if there is an explosive gas
WARNING
atmosphere present.

Multiple-Analyzer (Multi-Drop) System Configuration

When using multiple analyzers wired together (called a Multi-Drop


system), the configuration may vary due to the overall setup of your
application.

This section describes various connection options available for configuring


Multi-Drop systems.

To configure analyzers in a Multi-Drop system:

1. Choose the appropriate port, either RS-232 or RS-485.

2. If using the RS-485 port, select either a 2- or 4-wire link for both
Customer Data Acquisition and Remote Service ports.

3. For termination and biasing of RS-485 links, refer to Figure 3-7. Refer to
Figures 3-5 and 3-6 for communication/termination options and
jumper (JP) locations/settings.

The termination and biasing options will depend on the analyzer role
and location in the network (master or slave, located at the end of the
transmission line or at a drop point). It will also depend on whether a
2- or 4-wire line is used, and the transmission line conditions (e.g.,
length of cable, or termination and biasing on the other end of the
cable).

3-20 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


A
RX+
R J302 (Customer Data Acquisition) J303 (Remote Service Port)
B
RX- JP305 (RX RT) 2-3 JP307 (RX RT) 2-3
JP306 (TX RT) 2-3 JP308 (TX RT) 2-3
(a) JP309 (RX RB1) 2-3 JP311 (RX RB1) 2-3

Y JP310 (TX RB1) 2-3 JP312 (TX RB1) 2-3


TX+
D JP313 (RX RB2) 2-3 JP315 (RX RB2) 2-3
Z
TX- JP314 (TX RB2) 2-3 JP316 (TX RB2) 2-3

A
RX+
R J302 (Customer Data Acquisition) J303 (Remote Service Port)

130
RT
B
RX- JP305 (RX RT) 1-2 JP307 (RX RT) 1-2
JP306 (TX RT) 1-2 JP308 (TX RT) 1-2

(b) JP309 (RX RB1) 2-3 JP311 (RX RB1) 2-3

Y JP310 (TX RB1) 2-3 JP312 (TX RB1) 2-3


TX+
D JP313 (RX RB2) 2-3 JP315 (RX RB2) 2-3

130
RT
Z
TX- JP314 (TX RB2) 2-3 JP316 (TX RB2) 2-3

+5V
R B1

619

A
RX+
R J302 (Customer Data Acquisition) J303 (Remote Service Port)
B
RX- JP305 (RX RT) 2-3 JP307 (RX RT) 2-3
R B2

JP306 (TX RT) JP308 (TX RT)


619

2-3 2-3
(c) +5V JP309 (RX RB1) 1-2 JP311 (RX RB1) 1-2
JP310 (TX RB1) 1-2 JP312 (TX RB1) 1-2
R B1

619

Y JP313 (RX RB2) 1-2 JP315 (RX RB2) 1-2


TX+
D JP314 (TX RB2) 1-2 JP316 (TX RB2) 1-2
Z
TX-
R B2

619

+5V
R B1

619

A
RX+
R J302 (Customer Data Acquisition) J303 (Remote Service Port)
130
RT

B
RX- JP305 (RX RT) 1-2 JP307 (RX RT) 1-2
R B2

JP306 (TX RT) JP308 (TX RT)


619

1-2 1-2
(d) +5V JP309 (RX RB1) 1-2 JP311 (RX RB1) 1-2
JP310 (TX RB1) 1-2 JP312 (TX RB1) 1-2
R B1

619

Y JP313 (RX RB2) 1-2 JP315 (RX RB2) 1-2


TX+
D JP314 (TX RB2) 1-2 JP316 (TX RB2) 1-2
130
RT

Z
TX-
NOTES:
1. RB - BIAS RESISTOR
R B2

619

2. RT - TERMINATION RESISTOR
3. RESISTANCE VALUES IN OHMS

Figure 3-7.
Various RS-485 port
terminations and bias
resistor configurations
(Host Controller board
Rev. B and newer).

Installation & Start-Up | 3-21


AC Power Connection and Fusing

The Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers require a power-


 disconnect switch (breaker), rated for at least 250 VAC, 4 A, that must
NOTE
be connected to, and mounted near, the analyzer (supplied by the
customer). To satisfy local electrical codes, the switch must be certified
by the local authority for the appropriate hazardous location.

For safety reasons during maintenance, this switch allows the main
AC power to be disconnected from the analyzer prior to performing
service on the analyzer.

The AC power connection to the analyzer is made to terminals on the AC


Terminal Strip in the Lower Enclosure (see Figure 3-8, Detail A). Connec-
tion details may vary depending on the analyzer and the installation site.
Refer to appropriate AC Power Connection drawings included in the
“Supplemental Information” tab of this manual, or in the Documenta-
tion Package shipped with the analyzer for specific details.

The analyzer must be operated from a grounded power source; failure to


do so will void the warranty. Depending on analyzer configuration, the
supply voltage may be 115 VAC ± 10 % (47–63 Hz) or 230 VAC ± 10 %
(47–63 Hz). The nominal operating voltage and power consumption is
indicated on the metal nameplate that is secured to the front of the Lower
Enclosure. Verify that the operating voltage indicated on the label agrees
with the operating voltage indicated on the documentation supplied
with the analyzer. The analyzer is intended for use in Installation Cat-
egory II (Overvoltage Category) and AC power requirements for each
analyzer system are specified on the system electrical drawings.

3-22 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


LOWER ENCLOSURE

DETAIL A

Figure 3-8.
Conduit entries and
AC power connection
locations, Lower
Enclosure (North
American).

 Figure 3-8 illustrates a basic analyzer used in North American-


style applications. Your application may differ. Refer to the “Supple-
NOTE
mental Information” tab of this manual or the Documentation
Package shipped with the analyzer for the actual drawing for your
analyzer.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-23


System 200 Configurator Software Installation
AMETEK’s proprietary System 200 931 & 932 Configurator Software is
included with the analyzer. The primary use of the software is to configure
the analyzer’s operating parameters and to control the functions of the
analyzer. While working from the Configurator Software you can view real-
time and historical data, and modify configuration and calibration param-
eters. Details of how to perform these tasks are described, primarily, in
Chapter 4. The software is also necessary while performing maintenance and
while troubleshooting the analyzer. The majority of these functions are
performed from the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box of the software. Details
of these tasks are described in other chapters of this manual.

The software also provides advanced software features, such as graphing


and scanning data. Details of how to perform these tasks are described,
primarily, in Appendix A – Advanced Software Options.

Hazardous Locations:
! Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
WARNING
gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-


tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power up
the laptop computer if there is an explosive gas atmosphere present.

Minimum PC Requirements for Configurator Software

 The System 200 Configurator Software Version 2.0 is not backwards


compatible with Host Controller and Microcontroller software that is
NOTE
earlier than Version 2.0.

System 200 Configurator Software requires the following:


• CD-ROM drive (for installation); software is also available on 3.5 inch
floppy discs, upon request.
• Pentium 166 or faster.
• 16 MB RAM.
• 3 MB of available hard disk space.
• Sound Card (for alarms) recommended, not required.
• Windows 98 / ME / NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP.
• 800 x 600 resolution or higher recommended.
• 256-color display, 32767 colors (HiColor, 16-bit) recommended.

3-24 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Installing the System 200 Configurator Software

 During installation, AMETEK recommends installing the software


and program icons in the default directories.
NOTE

To install the System 200 Configurator Software on your computer:

1. Insert the AMETEK Configurator Software CD in the CD-ROM


drive. The auto-setup program will run and begin the installation.
The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard screen will appear.

2. Click Next to continue with the setup. The Readme Information


screen will appear.

3. Click Next to continue. The Destination Folder screen will appear


(Figure 3-9). Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.

By default, the software will be installed in C:\AMETEK\S93x.

AMETEK recommends using the default directory. Otherwise, click


Change to view the Change Current Destination Folder screen and
navigate to the folder you wish to install the software in. Or, create a
new directory.

Figure 3-9.
Destination Folder
screen.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-25


4. Click Next to continue. The software will install and the
InstallShield Wizard Completed screen (Figure 3-10) will appear. If
you plan to use the Configurator Software immediately, enable
Launch the program (selected by default). Click Finish and then
remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive.

 If the software prompts you to restart your computer, click No.


NOTE

You can also start the software by clicking 931 & 932 Configurator
from the Start\Programs\Ametek menu.

The software will create a shortcut icon on the desktop to start the
 software (called 931 & 932 Configurator).
NOTE

For details about using System 200 Configurator Software to commu-


nicate with the analyzer, refer to “Establishing Communication
Between the Analyzer and Computer,” later in this chapter.

Figure 3-10.
InstallShield Wizard
Completed screen.

3-26 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Removing the Configurator Software
To remove the System 200 Configurator Software from your computer:

1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings, and then Control
Panel.

2. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.

3. Select AMETEK 931 & 932 Configurator and click Add/Remove to


automatically remove it.

4. In the C:\AMETEK\S93x folder, delete all remaining folders and files,


including the S93x folder.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-27


Analyzer Start-Up and Verification
This section describes equipment and controls on the analyzer system
that require adjustments and settings before, during, and after power-
up. For the locations of analyzer equipment or controls that require
adjustments, refer to the Overall Component Layout drawing in the
“Supplemental Information” tab of this manual, or the Documentation
Package shipped with the analyzer.

Powering Up the Analyzer


When powering up the analyzer, certain checks should be performed to
ensure the analyzer is operating properly. These checks are discussed in
the following power-up procedures. If there are problems encountered
during power-up, refer to the “Analyzer Start-Up Diagnostic Checklist,”
later in this chapter, for help in diagnosing and correcting problems.

Before powering up the analyzer, test the area for flammable gases. If
! an explosive gas atmosphere is present, do not apply power to the
WARNING
analyzer or any alternate power sources that supply power to the
analyzer components. Proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

Before operating the analyzer for the first time, following a power-up
! or reset, or after maintenance, you must manually block in the sample
WARNING gas flow.

Also, for verification and troubleshooting purposes during power up,


it will be necessary to work with the Upper and Lower Enclosures
open. Before powering up the analyzer, the area first must be tested for
hazardous gases (and found to be safe).

When the Electronics Enclosures are open, take appropriate precau-


tions to avoid electrical shock. Hazardous voltages are present
inside.

Do not apply power to the analyzer if any of its flamepaths appear to


! be scratched, indented, or worn. Applying power to an analyzer with
WARNING a damaged flamepath is dangerous and could result in serious
injury or death and/or serious damage to equipment.

3-28 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


To power up the analyzer and verify it is operating properly:

1. Apply main AC power to the analyzer.

Establish communication between the analyzer and the Configurator


Software. (See “Establishing Communication Between the Analyzer
and Computer,” following this section for information on how to do
this.)

2. Perform the following checks to ensure the analyzer starts up prop-


erly and is ready to be commissioned into operation.

If you cannot verify these checks, refer to “Analyzer Start-Up Diag-


nostic Checklist,” later in this chapter, for corrective action to take.
Resolve any problems before proceeding to the next start-up stage.

a. Verify the operation of the status relays on the Customer I/O


board (Figure 3-11):

• The Alarm Valid Status Relay and the two Concentration


Alarm Relays will be in the de-energized state. Observe the
green LED D406 and the two red LEDs D407 and D408. Each
of these LEDs should be on to indicate normal operation.

• The state of the Fault (Fail) Status Relay and the Warning
Status Relay depends on the current status of the analyzer.
However, it is most likely that both relays will be de-energized
upon initial power-up as the temperature of the Optical
Bench has not yet reached its setpoint, and is generating an
alarm error fault (“f: Probe temperature too low” – if the
Heated Sample Probe is used) and warning (“w: Bench tem-
perature out of range”). Verify this in the HC Scode and MC
Scode alarm lists on the Status tab of the 931 & 932 Properties
dialog box. These green LEDs D404 (Fail) and D405 (Warning)
will be off in this case.

b. Upon power-up, all solenoids will remain de-energized (off) for


at least five minutes. Verify this by viewing the red LEDs D411,
D410, and D409 on the Customer I/O board (Figure 3-11). (This
may vary, depending on system configurations.)

c. The Probe heater (if the Heated Sample Probe is used) will be
turned on to heat up the Probe. Verify this by viewing the red
LED D401 on the Customer I/O board (Figure 3-11). It should be
on steady or pulsing.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-29


Figure 3-11.
Customer I/O board
(P/N 100-1758).

3-30 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


d. The green status LED (LED100) on the Host Controller board
(Figure 3-6) will stay on continuously for a few seconds before
pulsing at a rate of once per second. Verify this operation. The
pulsing indicates that communication is established between
these boards.

You can also verify communication between the Host Controller


board and the Microcontroller board by viewing LEDs D201 and
D200 on the Microcontroller board (Figure 3-12). Both LEDs
should be pulsing in unison once per second.

e. Check the UV lamps to ensure they are firing (flashing) after


communication between the Host Controller and
Microcontroller boards has been established.

f. The Optical Bench heater will turn on to heat up the Optical


Bench and the Measuring Cell heater (if optional Heated Mea-
suring Cell is used) will turn on to heat up the Measuring Cell.

You can verify these heaters are on by observing that the red LED
(LED201, Optical Bench heater) and the LED (LED200, Measur-
ing Cell heater) on the Micro-Interface board (see Figure 3-2 for
location of board) are on continuously or pulsing.

g. The following steps require the use of System 200 Configurator


Software. For details about using the software to communicate
with the analyzer, refer to “Establishing Communication Between
the Analyzer and Computer,” later in this chapter.

Before proceeding, save the factory parameter settings to use as a


reference later, if required. For information on how to do this, refer
to “Saving Analyzer Configuration Parameters” in Chapter 4.

Check the current start-up temperature and set point readings


for each of the temperature-controlled zones. To do this:

First, select the Analyzer Data tab to view the current tempera-
ture readings, under Temperature Zones. Record the current
values for each temperature-controlled zone. You can use these
values as a reference later while comparing the temperature value
(after the analyzer has warmed up). This will help you to deter-
mine if the signal wiring is properly terminated and if all of the
circuitry is operating properly.

Next, click the Setup tab and then click the Temp Control button
to view the Temperature Control dialog box (Figure 3-13).

Installation & Start-Up | 3-31


Figure 3-12.
Microcontroller board
(P/N 100-1781).

3-32 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Figure 3-13.
Temperature Control
dialog box.

(Optical) Bench
Verify that the (Optical) Bench temperature Setpoint and Range
are correct. The Bench temperature setpoint should be at least
8 °C to 10 °C above the maximum ambient temperature around
the analyzer. For applications with maximum ambient tempera-
ture of 30 °C and below, a default setpoint temperature of 40 °C is
normally used. The temperature setpoint is set at the factory
using the ambient temperature data that is specific to the applica-
tion and location. Refer to Chapter 4 for additional information
about how to alter the setpoint or range.

The maximum usable Bench temperature Setpoint is 60 °C. Do


! not exceed this set point value.
CAUTION

Verify that the Too Hot setpoint for the Bench is correct. It
should be 5 °C to 10 °C above the Bench Setpoint temperature.
The Too Hot setpoint that is used should not exceed 65 °C. The
Too Hot setpoint is set at the factory using the ambient tempera-
ture data that is specific to the application and location.

Verify that the Too Cold setpoint for the Bench is correct. It
should be 5 °C to 10 °C below the Bench Setpoint temperature.
The Too Cold setpoint is set at the factory using the ambient
temperature data that is specific to the application and location.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-33


(Measuring) Cell
The (Measuring) Cell temperature Setpoint is factory-set. For
optional heated Measuring Cells, this parameter should be at least
5 °C above the dewpoint temperature of the sample gas. If the
Measuring Cell is unheated, the setpoint will be 0 °C. In this case,
the ambient temperature should be at least 5 °C above the sample
dewpoint temperature.

Verify that the Too Hot setpoint for the Cell is correct. It should
be 5 °C to 10 °C above the Cell Setpoint temperature. The Too Hot
setpoint is set at the factory using the ambient temperature data
that is specific to the application and location.

Verify that the Too Cold setpoint for the Cell is correct. It should
be 5 °C to 10 °C below the Cell Setpoint temperature. The Too
Cold setpoint is set at the factory using the ambient temperature
data that is specific to the application and location.

(Sample) Probe – Optional


The (Sample) Probe temperature Setpoint is factory-set. For
systems using an optional Heated Acid Gas Probe, this parameter
should be at least 5 °C above the dewpoint temperature of the
sample gas. If the Sample Probe is unheated, the setpoint will be
0 °C. In this case, the ambient temperature should be at least 5 °C
above the sample dewpoint temperature.

Verify that the Too Hot setpoint for the Probe is correct. It should
be 5 °C to 10 °C above the Probe Setpoint temperature. The Too
Hot setpoint is set at the factory using the ambient temperature
data that is specific to the application and location.

Verify that the Too Cold setpoint for the Probe is correct. It
should be 5 °C to 10 °C below the Probe Setpoint temperature.
The Too Cold setpoint is set at the factory using the ambient
temperature data that is specific to the application and location.

Finally, save any changes by clicking OK to return to the Setup


tab and then click the Save CFG to EEPROM button to save the
changed parameters to EEPROM; otherwise, click Cancel.

3-34 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


h. Verify that each current and voltage output channel configured
has the correct range applied for the application. Outputs will
vary, depending in the application and analyzer. Model 931
Analyzers are typically equipped with only one V/I output, while
Model 932 Analyzers may have up to four.

Verify the correct range for the current and voltage output
channels:

From the Setup tab click the Output button to view the Output
Setup dialog box (Figure 3-14).

• For each configured channel, confirm that the Low Scale and
High Scale for Current Outputs and Voltage Outputs are the
correct minimum and maximum ranges required. Compare
these values to the factory settings listed on the Analyzer
Programming Parameters sheet included in the “Supplemen-
tal Information” tab of this manual, or the Documentation
Package shipped with the analyzer.

• If you plan to alter the ranges, refer to “Output Setup” in


Chapter 4 and “Analog Output Calibration” in Chapter 5 for
additional information. If any changes are made click OK to
return to the Setup tab and then click the Save CFG to
EEPROM button to save the changed parameters to
EEPROM; otherwise, click Cancel.

Figure 3-14.
Output Setup dialog box
(with two streams).

Installation & Start-Up | 3-35


Verify that the Concentration Alarms (1 and 2) are configured
correctly for the specific application:

From the Setup tab click the Alarm/Stream Switch button to


view the Alarm Setting and Stream Switch Parameters dialog
box (Figure 3-15).

• The alarm setpoint ranges are set at the factory using the data
that is specific to the application. Compare these values to the
factory settings listed on the Analyzer Programming Param-
eters sheet included in the “Supplemental Information” tab of
this manual, or the Documentation Package shipped with the
analyzer.

• If you plan to alter the ranges, refer to “Alarm Setting and


Stream Switch Parameters” in Chapter 4 for additional infor-
mation. If any changes are made click OK to return to the
Setup tab and then click the Save CFG to EEPROM button to
save the changed parameters to EEPROM; otherwise, click
Cancel.

Figure 3-15.
Alarm Setting and
Stream Switch
Parameters dialog box.

3-36 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


i. If the analyzer will be using serial communication to communi-
cate with a Customer Data Acquisition system, you will need to
verify and/or set up the following parameters to enable the
Modbus port. This is done using Modbus protocol on a RS-485
link. To do this:

From the Setup tab, click Modbus to view the Modbus dialog
box (Figure 3-16).

Figure 3-16.
Modbus dialog box.

Provide the following information:

Address: Enter the Modbus network address assigned to


the analyzer (typical default setting is “1”).

Baud Rate: Select the baud rate of the Modbus network.

Stop Bits: Select the number of stop bits of the Modbus


network.

Parity: Select the parity of the Modbus network.

After you have entered the Modbus/Data Acquisition Port param-


eters, click OK to return to the Setup tab and then click the Save
CFG to EEPROM button to save the changed parameters to
EEPROM.

Detailed description of the Modbus implementation on the analyzer


 can be found in Appendix C.
NOTE

Installation & Start-Up | 3-37


j. View the Status tab and check for alarms (in the HC Scode and MC
Scode alarm lists). Temperature-related alarms should correct themselves
after the analyzer has warmed up to normal operating temperature. If
any alarms remain active, refer to “Analyzer Start-Up Diagnostic Check-
list” in this chapter or “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting” in Chapter 6
for more information on how to correct alarms.

After all alarms have cleared, recheck the temperature of each


zone. Compare the current temperatures to their respective set
point values and their start-up values (recorded earlier). Normal
operating temperatures are values that are within 5 % of the
Setpoint values.

3. If you cannot verify the observations listed in Step 2, refer to “Ana-


lyzer Start-Up Diagnostic Checklist” or the “Diagnostics and Trouble-
shooting” section in Chapter 6 for more information on how to
correct alarms or persistent problems. Resolve any problems before
proceeding to the next start-up stage.

4. If all of the temperature-controlled zones have reached normal


operating temperatures and there are still no alarm conditions or
other problems, perform a pressure leak check on the analyzer
sample system to ensure there are no leaks in the system.

To perform this test, follow the procedures listed under the section
titled “Sample System Leak Check,” later in this chapter. Then,
return to this section and complete the remaining steps.

5. After all of these checks have been made and verified, close the Upper
and Lower Enclosures. The sample gas should remain blocked in.

Use a soft, nonabrasive cloth to gently clean the mating areas


! (flamepath) of the Upper and Lower Enclosures before closing the
CAUTION
Upper and Lower Enclosures.

 The torque specification for fastening M10 screws is 9 ±1 Nm (80 in-lb).


NOTE

Replace the parts immediately if damage or wear is apparent.


! Contact AMETEK immediately if there is any doubt about the
WARNING
integrity of any flamepath.

6. Perform an Auto-Setup to optimize the PMT gains of the source


lamps. Information on how to do this is located in Chapter 6.

3-38 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Establishing Communication Between the Analyzer
and Computer
You establish communication with the analyzer by using a computer
running AMETEK’s Configurator Software.

Hazardous Locations:
! Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
WARNING
gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-


tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power up/
down the computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

To connect a computer to the analyzer and establish communication with


the analyzer:

1. Depending on the type of communication being used, follow the


appropriate setup requirements:

For Modbus Serial communication:


a. Connect the supplied serial communication cable to the com-
puter.

b. After the area has been tested for hazardous gases (and has been
found to be safe), loosen the hex screw on the cover of the Explo-
sion-Proof Digital Communications Port (RS-232) on the Lower
Enclosure enough to allow the cover to slide to the right and
reveal the Digital Communications Port.

c. Connect the other end of the serial communication cable to the


Digital Communications Port on the front of the Lower Enclo-
sure. Alternatively, connect this cable to the Remote Service Port
(RS-485, accessed from connector J303 on the Host Controller
board).

For Modbus TCP communication:


Communication between the analyzer and the software will be estab-
lished upon starting the Configurator Software. Proceed to Step 4.

Refer to “Hardware Configuration (Modbus TCP Communication),”


earlier in this chapter, for information about hardware requirements.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-39


2. Power up the computer and run the Configurator Software. To do
this:

a. Click the 931 & 932 Configurator shortcut icon on the desktop or
from the Start\Programs\Ametek menu. The software will start
and the Devices & Log window will appear in the AMETEK 931
& 932 Configurator window. From here, select Device Properties
from the Edit menu to view the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box
(General tab, Figure 3-17).

 The 931 & 932 Properties dialog box will be your primary interface
when working on the analyzer or viewing live data.
NOTE

Figure 3-17.
General tab
(with Modbus Serial
communication
settings).

b. By default, the Live Data and Device Enabled check boxes are
enabled. When Live Data is selected, the Configurator Software
automatically attempts to establish communication with the
analyzer. If the communication attempt fails, the communication
settings may be incorrect and/or the communication cable may
not be connected properly (or it may be damaged), or you may be
attempting to communicate with the wrong model of analyzer.

c. To confirm or configure communication settings, click the Setup


button to view the Communication Settings dialog box. Select
the communication option required to establish communication
with the analyzer, either Modbus Serial or Modbus TCP and
enter or select the appropriate information. Detailed descriptions
about these communication options are discussed in Chapter 4
under “Modbus Serial/Modbus TCP Communication Setup.”
Follow the appropriate procedures in that chapter to set up
communication settings, then return to this procedure.

3-40 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Also, confirm the instructions for setting up the Host Controller
board for service/customer digital communication by reviewing the
section “Digital Communication,” earlier in this chapter.

d. After configuring analyzer communication parameters, click OK


to initiate communication with the analyzer. The software will
revert to the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box (General tab) and
the analyzer will be Online, as indicated in the Status message
box.

The 931 & 932 Properties dialog box is your primary interface
with the analyzer when viewing live data, or when modifying or
viewing the analyzer’s configuration or calibration parameters.
Refer to “Starting the Configurator Software” in Chapter 4 for
information about the functions on the General tab, and all other
tabs.

 If at any time you close the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box (by
clicking OK or Cancel), the software will revert to the AMETEK 931
NOTE
& 932 Configurator screen. Return to the 931 & 932 Properties
dialog box by clicking Edit and then Device Properties.

Hazardous Locations:
! If you will be working with the computer powered up for prolonged
WARNING
periods, periodically test the area around the analyzer for hazard-
ous gases, according to your company’s safety policies.

Before powering down the computer or disconnecting the serial


communication cable from the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-
tions Port, test the area for hazardous gases and proceed only when
the area is safe.

3. After you have completed communicating with the analyzer, exit the
Configurator Software, power down the computer, and disconnect
the serial communication cable from the Explosion-Proof Digital
Communications Port on the Lower Enclosure.

4. Slide the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communications Port


to the left and hand-tighten the hex screw to secure the cover in
place.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-41


Configurator Software Troubleshooting

This section describes problems (error messages) that may be encoun-


tered while attempting to establish communication between the analyzer
and the computer, or when starting the software. Communication error
messages can be displayed in the Status field on the General tab and in
the Devices & Log window. If this window is not displayed in the 931 &
932 Configurator main window (see Figures 4-4 and 4-5), select Devices

& Log from the View menu or click to display it.

If communication problems occur, review this section and perform the


corresponding corrective action to fix any problems.

Problem Encountered
The “Wrong Device” message is displayed on the Devices & Log window.

Corrective Action
Check the analyzer markings to ensure it is a Model 931 or Model 932 Analyzer
(the 931 & 932 Configurator Software cannot communicate with other models of
analyzers, such as a Model 900 ADA Analyzer).

The Communication Protocol or Settings may be incorrect. Review the settings


in the Communication Settings dialog box (Modbus Serial or Modbus TCP)
and verify or set them to the proper settings. The address (Slave ID) must also
match that of the analyzer – check the analyzer address by selecting Modbus
from the Setup tab and viewing or changing the Address setting.

Problem Encountered
The “Connected” message is displayed on the Devices & Log window, but the
software is not communicating with the analyzer.

Corrective Action
Select the Live Data check box to establish communication.

Problem Encountered
The “DEMO Online” message is displayed in the Status field on the General
tab. This message will be displayed if the Live Data check box is not selected (but
the Device Enabled check box is).

Corrective Action
Select the Live Data check box to establish communication.

3-42 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Problem Encountered
The “OFFLINE” message is displayed in the Status field on the General tab.

Corrective Action
Observe the Device Enabled and Live Data check boxes on the General tab. One
or both of these check boxes may not be selected. Select both of them to establish
communication.

Check the Serial Communication Cable for proper connections and for damage
such as cuts, nicks, or burn marks. Also, check it to ensure the internal wiring is
still terminated at the connectors.

Problem Encountered
The “DISABLED” message is displayed in the Status field on the General tab.
This message will be displayed if the computer is connected to the analyzer but
is not communicating with it.

Corrective Action
Select the Device Enabled check box, if necessary, to establish communication.

Check the analyzer markings to ensure it is a Model 931 or Model 932 analyzer
(the 931 & 932 Configurator Software cannot communicate with other models of
analyzers).

Problem Encountered
The Device Properties command under the Edit menu is grayed out (access to
the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box is not available). If this occurs, the analyzer
configuration and calibration parameters cannot be viewed or modified. This
problem suggests that the “s93x.dys” file has become corrupt.

Corrective Action
Delete the “s93x.dys” file from the C:\Ametek\93x folder. The software will
restore this file (and correct the problem) the next time it is started.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-43


Analyzer Start-Up Diagnostic Checklist

This diagnostic checklist describes problems that may be encountered


while powering up the analyzer and/or preparing it for normal operation.
If the analyzer experiences problems during power-up, review this check-
list and perform the corresponding corrective action to fix any problems.

Problem Encountered
The LEDs for various analyzer operation are not operating properly, as described
in the procedures under “Powering Up the Analyzer.”

Corrective Action
Take appropriate safety precautions and check for proper I/O wiring and power
connections.

If the LEDs are still not operating properly, reset the analyzer. To do this, cycle off
the AC power to the analyzer for a minimum of 15 seconds before cycling it on
again.

Problem Encountered
One or both source lamps are not firing.

Corrective Action
Take appropriate safety precautions and check for proper wiring connections.

If the wiring is okay, check the connections of the lamps in their sockets. Review
the section titled “Source Lamp Replacement” in Chapter 6 to make adjustments
to the lamps. Perform an Auto-Setup if necessary to ensure the lamps are operat-
ing at peak efficiency.

3-44 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Problem Encountered
A temperature-controlled zone value is equal to or greater than the maximum
temperature range being used. A high temperature value may indicate a faulty
RTD for the related temperature-controlled zone.

View the Temperature Control dialog box to check the Range. Compare these
values to the Cell Temp RTD Range and/or Optical Bench Temp Range listed on
the Analyzer Programming Parameters sheet included in the “Supplemental
Information” tab of this manual, or the Documentation Package shipped with
the analyzer.

Corrective Action
Take appropriate safety precautions and check the related RTD for a short or an
open circuit. If necessary, replace the RTD with an AMETEK-approved replace-
ment part. Contact AMETEK for assistance.

Problem Encountered
Temperature-controlled zone values do not increase.

Corrective Action
Take appropriate safety precautions and:
• Check the fuses for the temperature-controlled zones to ensure they have
not blown. These fuses are located on the AC Distribution PWB in the
Lower Enclosure.
• Check the Thermo-Switch (Over-Temp) on the Optical Bench Assembly. If
the plunger has popped out, press it to reset it.
• Check for proper wiring terminations for the appropriate temperature-
controlled zone.

Problem Encountered
Alarms remain active after the analyzer has warmed up to normal operating
temperature, as displayed in the HC Scode and MC Scode alarm lists on the
Status tab.

The “f: Probe temperature too low” (if a Heated Sample Probe is used),
“w: Bench temperature out of range”, and “w: Cell temperature out of range”
alarm error messages will typically be displayed upon start-up due to low
temperatures in these temperature-controlled zones.

Corrective Action
If these or other alarms remain active, refer to the alarm conditions and correc-
tive action in Chapter 6.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-45


Sample System Leak Check
The analyzer has been checked at the factory for leaks. However, since
fittings can loosen during transport, the sample system should be
checked for leaks before any sample gas flows through the analyzer. The
sample line and vent line should also be checked for leaks.

Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
! gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.
WARNING

Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-


tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power up/
down the computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

Follow these steps to leak check the sample system:

1. Isolate the sample gas from the Sample Inlet by closing the isolation
valve on the probe. This will prevent sample gas from flowing
through the sample system.

2. Disconnect the Sample Line from the Sample Inlet and connect a
zero gas line to the Sample Inlet. This is in addition to the zero gas
line already connected to the Zero/Aspirator Drive Gas Inlet on the
analyzer.

Allow zero gas to flow into the Sample Inlet at a pressure approxi-
mately the same as the recommenced sample pressure for your
application to backpurge the entire sample system. Allow the purge
to continue for 5 minutes. Refer to system drawings in the “Supple-
mental Information” tab or the Documentation Package shipped with
the analyzer for sample pressure requirements.

3. Disconnect the vent tubing from the analyzer and plug it with a cap
fitting.

Open the Metering Valve and the Sample Flow Pressure Regulator
(regulator closest to the Sample Shut-Off Ball Valve on the Sample
Inlet line).

3-46 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


4. Start the Configurator Software and establish communications with
the analyzer.

a. From the Setup tab of the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box (Figure
3-18), click the Gas Calibration button to view the Gas Calibra-
tion dialog box (Figure 3-19).

b. Enter “2” (zero) in the Flow Control text field. Click OK to accept
the change but do not save the parameter changes to EEPROM (it
is a temporary change only).

Do not set the pressure higher than its upper pressure rating if the
! optional pressure transducer is installed. Refer to the system draw-
CAUTION
ings (in the “Supplemental Information” tab or the Documentation
Package shipped with the analyzer) for details about the pressure
transducer rating.

Figure 3-18.
Setup (Model 932).

Figure 3-19.
Gas Calibration dialog
box (Model 932).

Installation & Start-Up | 3-47


5. Use the Zero/Aspirator Pressure Regulator to pressurize the sample
system to 70 KPA (10 PSI) higher than the recommended sample
pressure.

The Sample Pressure Gauge and the Zero Gas Pressure Gauge
 must be set at the same pressure to avoid one leaking into the
NOTE
other. Adjust the Zero Gas Pressure Regulator until these pressure
readings are the same.

6. Close the Sample and Vent Shut-Off Ball Valves and allow the sample
system to remain pressurized for 10 minutes. Observe the pressure
gauges during this time. The pressure should not drop at all.

During this time, use a suitable leak detection fluid (such as Snoop®)
on all of the fittings except those that are hot, such as those on the
heated Measuring Cell (if used).

Do not use a leak detection fluid on hot fittings. If the analyzer


! system is at operating temperature, cool down heated zones before
CAUTION
using a leak detection fluid on the fittings.

7. If leaks are found, shut off the zero gas flow at the cylinder, bleed
down the sample system from the vent port of the analyzer (by
removing the cap), check and repair all suspect fittings, and repeat
the procedures of testing/repairing/testing until all leaks have been
eliminated.

Be sure to recap the Vent outlet before retesting.

8. After all leaks have been eliminated, close the pressure regulators and
then remove the cap from the Vent line to allow the sample system
pressure to bleed down (by removing the cap).

9. Reconnect the vent line to the Sample Vent outlet on the analyzer
backpan.

Disconnect the zero gas line from the Sample Inlet and reconnect the
Sample Line to the Sample Inlet.

3-48 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


10. Return to the Gas Calibration dialog box and enter “0” (auto) in the
Flow Control text field. Click OK to return to the Setup tab and then
click the Save CFG to EEPROM button to save the changed param-
eters to EEPROM.

11. Close the Metering Valve and the Sample Flow Pressure Regulator
(regulator closest to the Sample Shut-Off Ball Valve on the Sample
Inlet line).

12. Slowly open the isolation valve on the probe. Open the Vent Shut-
Off Ball Valve and then slowly open the Sample Shut-Off Ball Valves
to allow sample gas into the sample system.

Adjust the sample gas to the recommended pressure listed on the


system drawings. Refer to “Setting Sample Response Time” for
details about setting the flow rate.

The analyzer is ready to analyze sample gas.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-49


Adjusting Analyzer Controls for Normal Operation

Setting Sample Response Time


Sample response time is determined by switching the analyzer’s Flow
Control mode from “zero” to “sample” and recording the time it takes the
analyzer to display the first reading after the switch.

The Metering Valve (or Aspirator Drive Air Regulator, if used) is used to
control the sample gas flow rate through the system. A good sample gas
flow rate (2.5 L/min (5 SCFH)) will ensure a measurement response time is
approximately 15 seconds. To obtain a response time within this range,
adjust the Metering Valve (or Aspirator Drive Air Regulator, if used) to the
appropriate sample pressure listed in the system drawings.

To check the sample response time, click the Gas Calibration button from
the Setup tab to view the Gas Calibration dialog box. Observe the output
concentration changes. If the sample response time is adequate (first
response after a Zero function is approximately 15 seconds), no further
adjustment is necessary for a Sample Line of less than 10 metres.

 The sample response time may vary, depending on Sample Line length.
NOTE

You can also use the rotameter to set the sample gas flow rate
! (arrows on the three-way ball valve handle facing downward).
CAUTION
After the flow rate has been set, switch the Bypass Valve to Bypass
by turning it 180° (arrow on valve handle facing upward).

This will ensure no damage is done to the Rotameter during


column switching.

3-50 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Optional pressure transducer (pressure compensation):
The analyzer pressure – measured by the pressure transducer, if used –
may also be used to set the sample flow rate. This is accomplished by
first measuring the process stream pressure with no flow (Metering
Valve or Drive Air Isolation Valve closed) and then adjusting the Meter-
ing Valve (or Aspirator Drive Air Regulator with the Drive Air Isolation
Valve open) to obtain a pressure of 5–10 mmHg less than the value
obtained with the valve closed. To check the Measuring Cell pressure
(Cell Pres), view the Analog Inputs dialog box by clicking the Analog
Inputs button from the Setup tab.

 To avoid damaging the pressure transducer, do not set the pressure


higher than the pressure transducer rating, either 0–210 KPAA
NOTE
(0–30 PSIA) or 0–700 KPAA (0–100 PSIA).

Adjusting the Zero Gas Flow Rate


Adjusting the zero gas flow rate is necessary to get a good zero response.
To obtain a good zero gas flow rate, adjust the rotameter for a flow rate
of 1 L/min (2 SCFH).

If the zero flow is set too high, then the zero gas cylinder will need to be
charged more often. It is important to note that in the simplest analyzer
configuration with only one solenoid, if the analyzer is powered down or
has a fault, the analyzer will flow zero gas. A very high or prolonged zero
gas flow will empty a zero gas cylinder fairly quickly when there is a
fault. This is less critical if plant nitrogen or instrument air is being used
as the zero gas.

 Set the response time first to ensure a good zero.


NOTE
Some applications may require a higher flow rate.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-51


Normal Operation
During normal operation, the Display text field on the Optical Bench,
Gas Calibration, and Info dialog boxes, and Status tab displays the
output parameter names on the top line, while their corresponding values
are displayed on the bottom line. This information is updated once per
second.

During normal conditions, the text is Green; when there is a Warning or


Fault alarm present, the text is Red. If an alarm is present, view the HC
Scode and MC Scode alarm lists on the Status tab to check which alarm is
present. Refer to the “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting” section in Chap-
ter 6 for details about the alarm and corrective action to take to reset the
alarm.

 Before engaging the analyzer into normal sampling operation, it is


important to observe and record initial readings of the photomultiplier
NOTE
tube (PMT) signals and the sample response time when the ana-
lyzer sample system is new and operating at peak efficiency.

Recording Initial Readings


Before operating the analyzer, it is important to observe the analyzer to
understand what normal operating conditions are, and how to use this
information to help you determine problems with the analyzer.

AMETEK recommends that you observe and record this information


every month to obtain a history. From these recordings, you will be able to
determine if there are problems with the analyzer, such as diminishing
PMT signals, or increasing sample response time. These problems typi-
cally indicate maintenance is required.

Keep the log book in a safe location until you need to review it for pat-
terns of diminishing PMT signals or a longer sample response time.

Recording PMT Signals

To check and record the initial PMT signal readings:

1. Manually zero the analyzer.

2. While the zero is in progress, observe the PMT Measure and PMT
Reference signals (on the Optical Bench Data tab) for the optical
filters and record the readings for both signals.

3-52 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


3. Record these signals in a log book every month.

It is important to record these values during a manual Zero


 function to simulate the same conditions during the original
NOTE
recordings. If the values are recorded using the sample gas, the
results may be skewed because the composition of the gas can vary.
All signals should return to within 5 % of the values recorded the
previous month.

Recording Initial Sample Response Time

The analyzer’s sample response time can be used for two functions. One
function is to help you set the sample gas flow rate (as discussed earlier in
this chapter, under “Setting Sample Response Time”). The other function
is to help you determine if the typical response time is increasing, which
may indicate a plug in the sample system.

Typically, a good response time is approximately 15 seconds when the


sample system is clean and operating at peak efficiency (response time
may vary due to Sample Line length).

To check and record the initial sample response time:

1. Manually zero the analyzer.

2. After the zero is complete, view the Status tab and observe the
output concentration changes. Observe and record the time it takes
the analyzer to display the first reading after the analyzer’s Flow
Control function switches from “zero” to “sample”.

3. If the sample response time is adequate (first reading after a Zero


function and after the analyzer’s Flow Control function switches
from “zero” to “sample” is approximately 15 seconds), no further
adjustment is necessary.

4. Record these signals in a log book every month.

 It is important to record the response time only after performing a


manual Zero function to simulate the same conditions during the
NOTE
original recordings.

Installation & Start-Up | 3-53


Analyzer Configuration
Completed Analyzer Configuration and EEPROM Data Sheets are
shipped with each analyzer. These configuration sheets list all of the
settings that have been made to the analyzer at the factory (to meet
customer requirements). These sheets are located in the “Supplemental
Information” tab of this manual and in the Documentation Package
shipped with the analyzer.

If any changes are made to the original configuration, be sure to record


the changes for later reference. If the EEPROM is replaced, this data must
be re-entered in order to override the factory defaults.

If necessary, refer to the original Configuration and EEPROM Data Sheets


to revert the analyzer back to its original settings.

3-54 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


CONTROLLER / USER INTERFACE

If potentially flammable gases or vapors are present, do not open any


! covers without first disconnecting power to the analyzer.
WARNING

Before proceeding to connect devices or power up a computer in a


! hazardous location, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
WARNING gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-


tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power up
the laptop computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

The AMETEK 931 & 932 System 200 Configurator Software program
provides a graphical user interface to configure and control the functions
of the analyzer. Running under Windows 98, ME, NT4.0, 2000, or XP, it
provides powerful features and flexible operating modes.

While working from the Configurator Software you can view real-time
and historical data, and modify configuration and calibration parameters.
The software is also necessary while performing maintenance and while
troubleshooting the analyzer. The majority of these functions are per-
formed from the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box of the software. From
this window, all current operating and calibration parameter settings can
be viewed from the various dialog boxes that can be selected from the
Setup tab. Live data for different aspects of the analyzer can be viewed
from the Status, Analyzer Data, and Optical Bench Data tabs.

Controller / User Interface | 4-1


This chapter is divided into the following sections:
• Configurator Software/User Interface overview
• Modifying analyzer device settings
• Scanning data
• Working with data files (saving, opening, scrolling, converting, and
printing)

 Graphical and data logging interface, plus configuration and device


setting operations and procedures not covered in this chapter can be
NOTE
found in Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation.

Configuration Software Overview – Getting Started


This section reviews the Configurator Software setup required to begin
working with the software. Before beginning, you should have already set
up the appropriate hardware and software as explained in Chapter 3.

Hazardous Locations:
! Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
WARNING
gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-


tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power up
the computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

Starting the Configurator Software


To connect a computer to the analyzer and establish communication with
the analyzer:

1. Connect the supplied serial communication cable between the com-


puter and the analyzer (and power up and run the Configurator
Software), as described in Chapter 3.

2. The software will start and the Devices & Log window (Figure 4-5)
will appear in the AMETEK 931 & 932 Configurator window. From
here, select Device Properties from the Edit menu to view the 931 &
932 Properties dialog box (General tab, Figure 4-1).

 The 931 & 932 Properties dialog box will be your main interface
when working on the analyzer or viewing live data.
NOTE

4-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


By default, the Live Data check box is enabled. When Live Data is
selected, the Configurator Software automatically attempts to establish
communication with the analyzer. If the communication attempt fails,
the communication settings may be incorrect and/or the communica-
tion cable may not be connected properly (or it may be damaged), or
you may be attempting to communicate with the wrong model of
analyzer. Refer to “Configurator Software Troubleshooting” in Chap-
ter 3 for information about how to resolve communication problems.

Figure 4-1.
General tab
(with Modbus Serial
communication
settings).

3. Confirm or configure communication settings by clicking Setup to


view the Communication Settings dialog box. Select the communica-
tion option required to establish communication with the analyzer,
either Modbus Serial or Modbus TCP and enter or select the appro-
priate information. Detailed descriptions about these communication
options are discussed in the following pages under “Modbus Serial /
Modbus TCP Communication Setup.” Then, return to this procedure.

After configuring analyzer communication parameters, click OK to


initiate communication with the analyzer. The software will revert to
the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box and the analyzer will be Online,
as indicated in the Status message box.

The 931 & 932 Properties dialog box is your primary interface with the
analyzer when viewing live data, or when modifying or viewing the
analyzer’s configuration or calibration parameters.

If at any time you close the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box (by
 clicking OK or Cancel), the software will revert to the AMETEK 931
NOTE
& 932 Configurator Software screen. Return to the 931 & 932
Properties dialog box by clicking Edit and then Device Properties.

Controller / User Interface | 4-3


Closing the Configurator Software

Hazardous Locations:
! Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
WARNING
gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

After you have completed communicating with the analyzer, exit the
Configurator Software and disconnect the computer from the analyzer.

To exit the software:

1. From the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box, click OK or Cancel at the
bottom of the screen.

2. From the AMETEK 931 & 932 Configurator window, select Exit from
the File menu.

3. Power-down the computer, and disconnect the serial communication


cable from the Explosion-Proof Digital Communications Port on the
Lower Enclosure.

4. Slide the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communications Port to


the left and hand-tighten the hex screw to secure the cover in place.

4-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


General Tab
When the analyzer is connected to the PC, the current Host Controller
Firmware Version Number and Serial Number of the analyzer will be
displayed in the analyzer information box to the right of PC Communica-
tions under the General tab.

Other parameters include:

PC Communications
Displays information that has been configured from the Communica-
tion Settings dialog box.

Setup
Allows you to choose the communication option required to
establish communication with the analyzer, either Modbus Serial
or Modbus TCP and enter or select the appropriate information.
Detailed descriptions about these communication options are
discussed in the following pages under “Modbus Serial / Modbus
TCP Communications Setup.”

Device

Name
Enter a tag number or tag name.

Description
Enter a description to further define the analyzer, such as a loca-
tion or area where it is installed in the plant.

This can be useful if using a Multi-Drop system, where multiple


analyzers are wired together on the same line. In this case, you can
assign different names and descriptions for each analyzer.

Save Configuration button


Saves the current analyzer configuration parameters to a file that
can be used later to restore the analyzer configuration settings. See
“Saving Analyzer Configuration Parameters,” later in this chapter,
for details about how to save configuration settings to a file.

Restore Configuration button


Retrieves previously saved analyzer configuration parameters
from a “.dev” file on the computer. See “Restoring Analyzer Con-
figuration Parameters,” later in this chapter, for details about how
to restore configuration data to an analyzer.

Controller / User Interface | 4-5


Device Enabled

Checked (default) Allows communication with the analyzer,


and allows the user to set up system con-
figurations.

Not Checked Device communication is disabled.

Live Data

Checked (default) Software uses live data from the analyzer.

Not Checked Software uses demonstration data.

Status
Displays the status of the analyzer (device) you are communicating
with. Refer to “Configurator Software Troubleshooting” in Chapter 3
for information about how to correct the problem.

“OFFLINE” Displayed if the PC is not communicating


with the analyzer (one or both of the Device
Enabled and Live Data check boxes are not
selected).

“Online” Displayed if the PC is communicating with


the analyzer (Device Enabled and Live
Data check boxes are selected).

“DISABLED” Displayed if the PC is connected to the


analyzer but is not communicating with it
(Device Enabled and Live Data check boxes
are not selected).

“Device Not Found” Displayed if the analyzer’s Serial Port


Configurations do not match the
computer’s.

“DEMO Online” Displayed if the PC is not connected to the


analyzer (or the Live Data check box is not
selected and the Device Enabled check box
is selected).

Configurator Software version


Displays the version of Configurator Software running (located to the
right of Live Data).

4-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Modbus Serial / Modbus TCP Communication Setup

Before accessing the local service port on the front of the Lower
! Enclosure, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous gases and
WARNING
proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-


tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power up/
down the computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

To allow Modbus Serial or Modbus TCP communication between the


Configurator Software and the analyzer, the software settings must be
configured to match the settings of the analyzer.

To set up the software to allow Modbus Serial or Modbus TCP communi-


cation between it and the analyzer:

1. Start the Configurator Software. The 931 & 932 Properties dialog box
(General tab) will appear.

2. Click the Setup button (or click the Live Data check box) to view the
Communication Settings dialog box (Figure 4-2). This dialog box
defaults to Modbus Serial. If you require Modbus TCP, select it. The
screen will change to display appropriate parameters (Figure 4-3).

Figure 4-2.
Communication
Settings dialog box
(Modbus Serial
communication).

Figure 4-3.
Communication
Settings dialog box
(Modbus TCP
communication).

Controller / User Interface | 4-7


3. Enter or select the communications information for either selection:
Settings
Port (Modbus Serial only)
Select the COM port on the computer used to communicate
with the analyzer.

Stop Bits (Modbus Serial only)


Displays and allows you to select the number of stop bits of
the Modbus network.

Parity (Modbus Serial only)


Displays and allows you to select the parity of the Modbus
network.

Baud (Modbus Serial only)


Baud rate at which data will be transferred. The baud rate is
fixed at 9600.

IP Address (Modbus TCP only)


Enter a unique address for each analyzer. This is determined
based on network settings for the analyzer.

Slave ID
This is the Modicon Modbus® slave address of the analyzer. If
the RS-232 port is selected, the address setting is not appli-
cable (it is grayed out).

If the RS-485 port is selected, be sure to enter a unique


Modbus address (Slave ID) for the analyzer.

For Modbus Serial communication interface:


0 = Disabled
1–255 = Enabled

For Modbus TCP communication interface:


0,1 = Disabled
2–255 = Enabled

4-8 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Time out (ms)
Enter a time out value (duration) that the software will use to
attempt to establish communications with the analyzer.
AMETEK recommends a value of 1000 ms.

If you are unsure of the Modbus address assigned to the analyzer,


 you can use the alternate or “service” access code (i.e., enter 255 in
NOTE the Slave ID field) to allow communication between the analyzer
and the computer.

4. Click OK to initialize communication with the analyzer. The software


will revert back to the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box and the ana-
lyzer will be Online, as indicated in the Status message box.

 If the computer cannot establish communication with the analyzer,


refer to “Configurator Software Troubleshooting” in Chapter 3 for
NOTE
information about how to correct the problem.

5. View the Status tab. Live data should begin updating within 10 sec-
onds.

Controller / User Interface | 4-9


User Interface
The software allows you to customize how data is viewed and to set up
your display. This is done from the Main Window (Figure 4-4).

Standard Toolbar
Custom Mode Toolbar
Data File Toolbar

Main Window

Figure 4-4.
Configurator Software
main window (Trend
mode display active). Status Bar

Setting Up Your Screen


Using the View menu items, set up your software by selecting the
toolbars you want displayed. If the option has a checkmark beside it, the
toolbar is active. To toggle these functions on/off, select the menu option
again. The areas that make up the Main Window include:

• Standard Toolbar
Contains icons that are used most often including the main display
modes.

• Custom Mode Toolbar


Contains icons that are used to create Custom mode displays.

• Data File Toolbar


Contains icons that are used to save data files.

• Status Bar
Located at the bottom of the window, the Status Bar displays system
messages, including information such as if the system is currently
scanning.

4-10 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


View / Configure Analyzer Parameters and Data
The 931 & 932 Properties dialog box – which is your primary interface
with the analyzer – contains several tabs (screens of information) that
allow you to set up communications, view real-time and historical data,
and modify configuration and calibration parameters for the analyzer.
When the software is first started, this dialog box defaults to the General
tab. The descriptions of the parameters on this and other screens can be
found throughout this chapter.

The settings for your analyzer have been configured at the factory to
! meet specified customer requirements. Changing the factory-set
CAUTION configuration could cause the analyzer to operate incorrectly.

Viewing Device Activities


The Devices & Log window (Figure 4-5) displays the status of all analyz-
ers (devices), plus a system event log of all analyzer operations. This
window, which is displayed within the 931 & 932 Configurator main
window (Figure 4-4), can help you diagnose problems with the analyzer.

Figure 4-5.
Devices & Log
window.

To display the Devices & Log window:

1. From the View menu, select Devices & Log or click . A log is
displayed showing all active devices and their status.

 The system log is saved in a text file in the “Log” folder.


NOTE

Controller / User Interface | 4-11


2. From here you can view a log of all related activity for active devices
such as when scans were started or completed as well as any alarm
conditions. It also provides information on the data source for the
reading under the Source field (e.g., Dev1, or Device 1). The Status
field indicates the current status of the analyzer (e.g., Online).

3. To remove the display, select View and then Devices & Log again or

click .

Saving Analyzer Configuration Parameters


The Configurator Software allows you to save current analyzer (device)
setup configuration parameters to a file that can be used later as a refer-
ence or to restore the parameters to their original settings (if they are
changed). This function is useful to create a backup copy of the analyzer
configuration parameters, or if you will be replacing the analyzer’s
EEPROM.

If major changes are made to the analyzer configuration parameters, it


 is important to make a backup copy of these settings. This file can then
NOTE
be used to restore all parameters to their original settings in the event
of an EEPROM failure or it being damaged physically or electrically.

To save configuration parameters:

1. View and record the current version of the Host Controller and
Microcontroller software to ensure they are an older version than that
being replaced.

From the General tab of the 931 & 932 Properties dialog box, view
and record the current version of the Host Controller (HC ver) and
Microcontroller (MC ver) software, located to the right of PC Commu-
nications on this tab.

2. From the General tab, click the Save Configuration button to view
the Save As dialog box. To store the file, navigate to C:\Ametek\93x
on the computer’s hard drive (AMETEK does not recommend saving
this file to another path).

3. Name the file and click Save. The file will be saved with a “.dev”
extension. This file can be used only by the Configurator Software.

4-12 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Restoring Analyzer Configuration Parameters
The Configurator Software allows you to retrieve previously saved ana-
lyzer configuration parameters to restore the parameters to their original
settings. This function is useful if you wish to recover analyzer configura-
tion parameters if changes have been made that you do not wish to keep,
or to restore the settings after replacing the analyzer’s EEPROM. The
configuration parameters are stored in a “.dev” file on the computer.

To restore configuration parameters:

1. Click the Restore Configuration button from the General tab of the
931 & 932 Properties dialog box to view the Open dialog box.

2. Navigate to the location of the file (for example, C:\Ametek\93x), select


it, and click Open to restore configuration parameters to the analyzer
you are communicating with.

During the parameters restoration, the analyzer will temporarily go


OFFLINE. After the restoration is complete, the Name and Descrip-
tion will change to reflect those of the saved parameters.

3. View the Devices & Log window. If the file restoration is successful,
the message “This new CFG has been restored successfully!” will be
displayed.

If the file that is being restored contains identical information as that


already saved to the analyzer’s EEPROM, the message “The restored
CFG is not new!” will be displayed in the Devices & Log window.

4. After the file restoration is complete, check the analyzer serial number
(on the General tab) to ensure it matches the analyzer serial number
(on the analyzer).

If the analyzer serial number is not displayed, enter it using the


Configurator Software:

a. Click Analyzer Info from the Setup tab.

b. In the Serial # field (Figure 4-6), enter the password


(9xxsnupdate [case sensitive]) and click Update to view the Serial
Number Update dialog box.

Controller / User Interface | 4-13


Figure 4-6.
Serial Number Update
dialog box.

c. Enter the analyzer serial number (found on the analyzer backpan


or with its documentation) and click OK to save the serial num-
ber. Then, click the Save CFG to EEPROM button on the Setup
tab to save the change to the analyzer’s EEPROM.

4-14 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Modifying Analyzer Device Settings

Descriptions for the functions on the General tab can be found earlier
 in this chapter, under “Starting the Configurator Software.”
NOTE

Working From the Setup Tab


The Setup tab (Figure 4-7) contains all functional parameters that control
the operation of the analyzer. These screens, which allow you to view all
information about the analyzer, are accessed by clicking the appropriate
Modify button.

The settings for your analyzer have been configured at the factory to
! meet specified customer requirements. Changing the factory-set
CAUTION
configuration could cause the analyzer to operate incorrectly.

The Setup screens on this tab cannot be accessed unless communication


between the software and the analyzer has been established. If the
Modify (Setup) buttons on this tab are grayed out, check the status of the
system from the General tab. You will have to establish communication
with the analyzer before you can view or configure its parameters.

Figure 4-7.
Setup tab (Model 932).

For all first-time analyzer setups, set up the analyzer from the 931
 & 932 Properties dialog box. From here, you must check the
NOTE
Device Enabled and Live Data text boxes to initiate communica-
tion. Then, you must set up communication parameters by clicking
the Setup button from the General tab.

Controller / User Interface | 4-15


While changing parameters from individual Modify (Setup) Configura-
tion/Calibration dialog boxes, observe the following functions and rules:

• Information and/or functions that are grayed out are not applicable
or currently unavailable for the analyzer you are currently working
with.

• After changing any of the parameters or their values from any setup
screen, you must click the OK or Apply button on that screen (or
within the group) to activate the new settings. These new settings will
be sent to the analyzer.

If any configuration parameters have been changed, the Save CFG to


EEPROM button (Setup tab) will become active to allow you to save
the change (permanently) to the analyzer’s EEPROM. If you only
want the changes to be in effect temporarily, do not click Save CFG to
EEPROM.

 Parameters in groups that have their own Apply button cannot be


reverted to their original state by clicking the Refresh button if the
NOTE
changes have already been applied.

• You can change numerous parameter values on a screen before click-


ing OK or Apply.

• When you make changes to parameters, the Refresh button in the


System 200 Configurator Software will flash to indicate that configura-
tion or calibration changes have been made. When you click this
button, the software polls the parameters and updates the changes in
the software.

• On individual setup screens, click Refresh to change the values back


to their original settings. When you click this button, any values that
you have changed but do not wish to set permanently will revert to
the settings that were last saved to the system’s EEPROM. Changes
can only be refreshed (reverted to their original setting) if they haven’t
already been applied (before you click the Apply button) or saved
(before you click the Save CFG to EEPROM button on the Setup tab).

• If you want the parameter changes to be valid only for the current
session, do not click Save CFG to EEPROM. The changes will revert to
the previously saved changes after the system is powered down and
then powered up again, or if the analyzer is reset.

• You can make changes to all or some of the Modify Configuration


dialog boxes before clicking Save CFG to EEPROM.

4-16 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Modify
Contains numerous buttons that allow you to view and set up differ-
ent aspects of the analyzer. These buttons and their setup screens are
discussed in detail in the following pages.

 Depending on the analyzer you are working with, some functions


accessed from the Modify buttons may not be available. Functions
NOTE
that are not available for a given analyzer are grayed out.

Dialog boxes for each of the Setup Configuration/Calibration screens


discussed in this chapter are sample screens only. Refer to the actual
screens in the software for enabled/valid parameters for your analyzer.
Also, refer only to the descriptions of the enabled functions on these
screens, as listed throughout this chapter.

Message box
The message box (to the right of the Modify buttons) displays infor-
mation about the software and analyzer it is currently communicating
with.

The Model ID (identification) number is also displayed to indicate the


model of analyzer currently communicating with the analyzer. The ID
number corresponds with a list that can be seen in the Info dialog box.

Save CFG to EEPROM


Click this button to permanently save any changes you have made to
operating parameters to the analyzer’s on-board EEPROM.

Controller / User Interface | 4-17


Saving Analyzer Configuration Parameters to an ASCII File

When you select the Print to File button from the Setup tab, the Save
As dialog box appears (Figure 4-8). Select the path you wish to save the
file to, give the file a name, and then click Save. The software saves the
current analyzer configuration parameters to an ASCII file. Note that the
file will be saved with a “.dmp” extension.

Figure 4-8.
Save As dialog box
(Print to File button).

Printing Analyzer Configuration Parameters

When you select the Print button from the Setup tab, the Print dialog box
appears (Figure 4-9). Make sure a printer is connected to the computer or
available through a network before printing these settings. Click OK to
print a hard copy of the current analyzer configuration parameters.

Figure 4-9.
Print dialog box
(Print button).

4-18 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Refreshing Configuration Parameters

When configuration or calibration parameter settings have been modi-


fied, the Refresh button on the Setup tab (see Figure 4-7) will flash to
indicate that changes have been made. When you click this button, the
software polls the parameters at the analyzer and updates the changes in
the Configurator Software with the original analyzer settings.

Saving Configuration Parameters to EEPROM

After changing any of the parameters or their values from any setup
screen, click OK to exit the screen and return to the Setup tab (see Figure
4-7). Parameter changes are evident when the Save CFG to EEPROM
button is active. Click this button to activate the new settings and to
permanently save the new value(s) to the analyzer’s EEPROM.

Controller / User Interface | 4-19


Optical Bench

The Optical Bench dialog box (Figure 4-10), accessed by clicking the
Optical Bench button, allows you to modify Optical Bench control and
data acquisition parameters that can be viewed and modified. To access
this dialog box, click Optical Bench from the Setup tab.

Figure 4-10.
Optical Bench dialog
box (Model 932).

 ‘**’ following the description name indicates the parameter is used


primarily for diagnosing problems with the analyzer; therefore,
NOTE
these parameters should only be modified by a trained technician.

Lamp Base (mV)**


This defines the base-current set point for each source lamp (1 and
2), which is the minimum operating current. This is user-adjustable
but should not be changed.

1 = Lamp 1 (closest to the Measuring Cell)


2 = Lamp 2 (farthest from the Measuring Cell)
Default Filter Pulses (mV)
Defines the source lamp pulse current control signal for each filter.
The normal operating range is between the Lamp Base and the Lamp
Max settings; the control signal for the key filter is Lamp Max. If a
filter position is not used, the Default Filter Pulse value must be set to
a negative number. The recommended value is negative base
(-2000 mV) set point.

4-20 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


ALC SetPt**
The Automatic Lamp Control Setpoint signal is obtained from the
Reference PMT for each filter (two for Model 931; up to six for Model
932) after the Auto-Setup function is complete. These values are
updated automatically by an Auto-Setup function. The Automatic
Lamp Control function adjusts the lamp pulses to maintain the
Reference PMT signals to these values.

ALC Gains (mV)**


This is the automatic lamp-control gain setting for each filter.

Tzero**
This is the PMT signal transmittance value of each filter, with Zero Gas
in the sample system. It is adjusted automatically whenever the
analyzer is zeroed.

ALC On button
The Automatic Lamp Control automatically turns on at the completion
of an Auto-Setup function, and should be on during normal opera-
tion. However, this function should be turned off while performing a
lamp alignment.

Checked (default) Automatic Lamp Control function is en-


abled.
Not Checked Automatic Lamp Control function is dis-
abled.

Bench Type**
Defines the Optical Bench orientation and the filter sequence assigned
to each source lamp. This is user-adjustable but should not be
changed.

Orientation This is the physical orientation of the


Optical Bench. Options and their uses
include:
0 = Normal (typical, factory default)
This is selected when the Measuring Cell is
connected to the Optical Bench on the left
side of the analyzer, when facing it.
1 = Reverse
This is selected when the Measuring Cell is
connected to the Optical Bench on the right
side of the analyzer, when facing it.

Controller / User Interface | 4-21


Filter Sequence This factory-set default specifies the order
in which the filters pass in front of the light
path of the source lamps. Options include:
000 = 1-3-5, 4-6-2 (typical factory default
for Model 932 Analyzers)
001 = 3-5, 4-6-1-2 (custom applications)
010 = 1-3-4-5, 6-2 (custom applications)
011 = motorless (1-3-2) (typical factory
default for Model 931 Analyzers)
100 = 1-3-5, 4-6-1(2) (custom applications)

Processing Filtration
MaxT90 (sec) This is the time (default is 60 seconds)
required for the output signal to reach 90
percent of the final value after a step
change in the concentration. Larger values
reduce the noise level on the output signal
but, at the same time, increase the sample
response time. This is user-adjustable but
should not be changed.
Sigma of Adaptive Filtering
This displays the expected noise level for
the lamps (default is 0.00025). This is user-
adjustable but should not be changed.
Samples per Peak**
For Model 931 Analyzers, this displays the number of times the PMT
signal is measured for each filter.

For Model 932 Analyzers, this displays the number of times the PMT
signal is measured while a filter is completely within the light path.

Delay (x1.6 µs)**


For Model 931 Analyzers, this displays the time from the beginning of
the lamp pulse to the first PMT signal measurement.

For Model 932 Analyzers, this displays the time interval between when
the filter becomes completely within the light path and the first PMT
signal measurement. The interval is shown as multiples of 1.6 micro-
seconds (µs).

4-22 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Wheel Revolutions for Avg**
This is the number of filter wheel rotations per minute (RPM) used to
calculate its RPM during one measuring cycle. Model 932 Analyzers
only.

K Msr**
This is the molar absorptivity of the gas species at the wavelengths
used, for the Measure PMT signal. Model 931 Analyzers only.

K Ref**
This is the molar absorptivity of the gas species at the wavelengths
used, for the Reference PMT signal. Model 931 Analyzers only.

Key Filter**
This displays the position of the key filter, which gives the weakest
signal for a given source lamp current.

PMT Level (mV)**


This displays the Photomultiplier Tube (PMT) gain control signal,
which is based on the signal from the PMT when the key filter is in the
light path. After a successful Auto-Setup, the value should be between
4500 mV DC and 7500 mV DC.

PMT Balance (mV)**


This displays a secondary Photomultiplier Tube (PMT) gain control
signal, which adjusts the PMT gain to equalize the PMT signals when
the key filter is in the light path. After a successful Auto-Setup, the
value should be between 1000 mV DC and 9000 mV DC.

Lamp Max (mV)**


This displays the voltage to which the lamp pulse current control
signal for the key filter location is set to during the Auto-Setup func-
tion. For Model 931 Analyzers, the default value is 6000 mV. For Model
932 Analyzers, the default value is 8000 mV.

Signal Max (mV)**


This displays a value that is used by the Auto-Setup function to adjust
the PMT signal (Reference or Measure PMT) with the highest gain.
The PMT signal with the highest gain is set to SigMax when each filter
is in the light path while the Auto-Setup is in progress. SigMax should
be between 8000 mV and 9000 mV.

Controller / User Interface | 4-23


Display
During normal operation, these message lines display the real-time
status of the species being measured. The species is displayed on the
top line and the concentration value is displayed on the bottom line.

When an Auto-Setup function is in progress, messages that indicate


the current stage of the Auto-Setup function is displayed on the top
line (the concentration value continues to be displayed on the bottom
line). Auto-Setup messages include:

• Adjusting PMT Level


• Adjusting Lamp Pulses
• Adjusting PMT Balance
• Adjusting PMT Level
• Adjusting Lamp Pulses
• Setting Up ALC
• Off/Completed

This information is also displayed on other dialog boxes and tabs.

During normal conditions, the text is Green; when there is a Warning


or Fault alarm present, the text is Red. If an alarm is present, refer to
the “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting” section in Chapter 6 for details
about the alarm and corrective action to take to reset the alarm.

Auto-Setup button
Initiates the Automatic-Setup function, which optimizes the PMT
gains and source lamp currents. This function combines automatic
signal adjustment with manual jumper positioning. The Auto-Setup
process takes approximately three minutes. Always perform an Auto-
Setup after any lamps, optical filters, or PMTs have been replaced.

After a successful Auto-Setup, the PMT Level should be between


4500 mV and 7500 mV, while the PMT Balance should be between
1000 mV and 9000 mV. If these values are outside these ranges, refer to
the section “PMT Level and PMT Balance” in Chapter 6 for more
information.

Cancel Auto-Setup button


Stops the Automatic-Setup function.

4-24 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Cell/Miscellaneous (Compensations) Parameters

The Cell/Misc Parameters dialog box (Figure 4-11) contains compensa-


tion parameters used in calculating the concentration, plus other miscel-
laneous parameters. They account for temperature, pressure, compress-
ibility, and other variations that affect the concentration reading com-
puted by the analyzer. To access this dialog box, click Cell/Misc from the
Setup tab.

Figure 4-11.
Cell/Miscellaneous
(compensations)
Parameters dialog box
(Model 932).

 ‘**’ following the description name indicates the parameter is used


primarily for diagnosing problems with the analyzer; therefore, these
NOTE
parameters should only be modified by a trained technician.

Cell Length**
Displays the axial length of the Measuring Cell gas space (centimetres
or inches).

Default Cell Temp


Displays the default temperature for the Measuring Cell (°C). This
value is used in place of the Measuring Cell temperature when mea-
sured temperature compensation is disabled.

Controller / User Interface | 4-25


Default Cell Pres
Displays the default absolute pressure for the Measuring Cell
(mmHg). This value is used in place of the Measuring Cell pressure
when active pressure compensation is disabled. You can enter a value
(i.e., the approximate Measuring Cell pressure) to place the pressure
compensation into fixed mode.

Refer to the appropriate settings, below, for jumper selectable pres-


sure ranges for the corresponding 100 PSIA or 30 PSIA Pressure
Transducer.

If the 100 PSIA pressure transducer is being used, the jumpers (JP301/
JP302) on the Customer I/O board allow you to re-scale the pressure
range. Jumper settings for the different ranges for this pressure
transducer are listed under “100 PSIA Pressure Transducer: Jumper
Settings, Customer I/O Board”.

100 PSIA Pressure Transducer:


Jumper Settings, Customer I/O Board
PSIA mmHg JP301 JP302
0–100 0–5171.5 A A
0–33 0–1706.6 A B
33–66 1706.6–3413.2 B B
66–100 3413.2–5171.5 C B

While the 30 PSIA pressure transducer can not be re-scaled, its


jumper settings are listed under “30 PSIA Pressure Transducer:
Jumper Settings, Customer I/O Board”.

30 PSIA Pressure Transducer:


Jumper Settings, Customer I/O Board
PSIA Pressure Range JP301 JP302
(0–30 PSIA) 0–1552 mmHg A A

 If changing the jumpers, be sure to make corresponding changes in


the System 200 Configurator Software.
NOTE

4-26 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Compressibility Correct Factor
In addition to pressure and temperature compensations of the concen-
trations according to the ideal gas law, it is possible to enter an addi-
tional parameter (Z) to account for the compressibility factor of the
sample gas. One value of Z is used for all species. The default value for
this parameter is ‘1’, but can be any value between 0.5 and 1.5. The
correction is applied to the concentrations in the following manner:

<Conc>corr. = <Conc>uncorr. / Z

Result Unit Conversion factors**


Result – Species (output) name.
Factor – Conversion factor: 1 = PPMV (1 x 104 = %)
Unit – User definable unit (PPMV, %, etc.)

Algorithm Setting check boxes


Displays the compensation settings (these apply only to Model 932
Analyzers, and are application dependant) and allows you to choose
an output format:
0 – NDR (Neutral Drift) Compensation
1 – Linearization Compensation 1
2 – Linearization Compensation 2

Output Format
Allows you to choose a format to output the Algorithm Setting,
either Concentration, Absorbance, or Transmittance.

If Absorbance or Transmittance is selected, the K-Factor must be


set to ‘1’.

For Model 931 Analyzers, this is done by entering ‘1’ in the K Msr
field on the Optical Bench dialog box.

For Model 932 Analyzers, this is done from the Matrix dialog box,
by entering ‘1’ in the top-left text field and each field going
diagonally to the lower-right text field. In addition, all other fields
on the Matrix dialog box must be set to zero (0).
Also, all Algorithm Setting selections on the Cell/Misc Param-
eters dialog box must be disabled (unchecked).

 IMPORTANT
Before changing these settings, be sure to record the values and
NOTE
selected options. These settings must be returned to their original
state when changing the output display to its original format.

Controller / User Interface | 4-27


Temperature Control

The Temperature Control dialog box (Figure 4-12) contains temperature


control parameters for all of the temperature-controlled zones measured
by the analyzer. To access this dialog box, click Temp Control from the
Setup tab.

Figure 4-12.
Temperature Control
dialog box (shown
with unheated
Measuring Cell).

‘**’ following the description name indicates the parameter is used


 primarily for diagnosing problems with the analyzer; therefore,
NOTE
these parameters should only be modified by a trained technician.

Bench
The measure range (°C) for the Optical Bench temperature-controlled
zone. For more information, refer to “Optical Bench” following these
descriptions.

Cell
The measure range (°C) for the Measuring Cell temperature-controlled
zone. For more information, refer to “Measuring Cell” following these
descriptions.

Probe
The parameters for the optional Heated Acid Gas Probe temperature-
controlled zone. For more information, refer to “Heated Acid Gas
Probe Temperature Control” following these descriptions. The Probe
temperature-controlled zone is optional (AMETEK Heated Acid Gas
Probe required).

4-28 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Setpoint
Displays the control operating set point for each temperature-con-
trolled zone (°C). This value is the temperature control set point at
which an alarm Warning or Fault will be set and displayed in the
software, and is used to alert the operator to analyzer operating
conditions.

Kp (band)**
Displays the proportional term of the PID temperature control algo-
rithm for each temperature-controlled zone.

Ti (sec)**
Displays the integral term of the PID temperature control algorithm
for each temperature-controlled zone (seconds).

Startup (%)
This is the default duty cycle percentages used upon start-up for each
temperature-controlled zone during steady-state operation at the set
point.

Too Cold
This is an alarm temperature setpoint for each temperature-controlled
zone. If the current temperature of the zone falls below its Too Cold
setpoint, it will cause the analyzer to default to an alarm state. For
more information, refer to “Optical Bench,” “Measuring Cell,” or
“Heated Acid Gas Probe” following these descriptions.

Too Hot
This is an alarm temperature setpoint for each temperature-controlled
zone. If the current temperature of the zone exceeds its Too Hot
setpoint, it will cause the analyzer to default to an alarm state. For
more information, refer to “Optical Bench,” “Measuring Cell,” or
“Heated Acid Gas Probe” following these descriptions.

Temperature
Displays the current temperature for each temperature-controlled
zone.

Duty Cycle (%)


This is the current duty cycle for each temperature-controlled zone
during steady-state operation at the set point.

Alarm Indicator
The alarm display box, at the bottom of this dialog box, displays all
current temperature-related alarms. If any alarms are active, refer to
the “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting” section in Chapter 6 for details
about the alarm, and corrective action to take to reset the alarm.

Controller / User Interface | 4-29


Optical Bench Temperature Control

The Optical Bench temperature is controlled to maintain a stable condition


for the analysis of the target species and to ensure that no condensation
forms to obscure the light path of the analyzer. Control is accomplished by
using an RTD and heater embedded in the Optical Bench Assembly.

The Optical Bench temperature control is protected by an independent


over-temperature circuit with a trip temperature of 65 °C. The default
temperature Setpoint for the Optical Bench is typically 40 °C but can be
modified through the Configurator Software. The Setpoint should be
approximately 8 °C to 10 °C above the maximum ambient temperature
around the analyzer, to a maximum of 60 °C. If the Optical Bench tem-
perature falls below its Too Cold setpoint or exceeds its Too Hot setpoint,
the analyzer will generate a “w: Bench temperature out of range” Warn-
ing alarm, displayed in the MC Scode alarm list on the Status tab.

The Optical Bench can be configured to measure in two different ranges


(see the “Optical Bench Temperature Range, JP301” configuration, below).
The ranges are selectable via a jumper on the Micro-Interface board (see
“Installing the Optical Bench Assembly” in Chapter 3) and changes in the
software. When the temperature of the Optical Bench is changed through
the software, jumpers on the Micro-Interface board must be changed
according to the “Optical Bench Temperature Range, JP301” configuration.
To verify proper range setting for your analyzer, refer to the Optical
Bench Temp Range indicated on the Analyzer Programming Parameters
sheet included in the “Supplement Information” tab of this manual, or the
Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

Optical Bench Temperature Range, JP301


(Micro-Interface Board)
Range Jumper Position Temperature Range
A (default) 2-3 31 °C to 47 °C
B 1-2 45 °C to 66 °C

4-30 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Measuring Cell Temperature Control

The Measuring Cell operating temperature is monitored (and controlled,


if the Measuring Cell is heated) and used to calculate the analyzer results.
If the Measuring Cell temperature falls below its Too Cold setpoint or
exceeds its Too Hot setpoint, the analyzer will generate a “Cell tempera-
ture out of range” alarm. The alarm can be either a Fault or Warning error,
depending on whether the analyzer is controlling the Measuring Cell.

If the analyzer is controlling the Measuring Cell (as is the case with a
heated Measuring Cell), it will generate a Fault alarm (“f: Cell tempera-
ture out of range” will be displayed in the MC Scode alarm list on the
Status tab). If the analyzer is not controlling the Measuring Cell (as is the
case with an unheated Measuring Cell), it will generate a Warning alarm
(“w: Cell temperature out of range” will be displayed in the MC Scode
alarm list on the Status tab).

The Measuring Cell temperature control is protected by an independent


over-temperature circuit, with a trip temperature of 170 °C. The default
temperature setpoint for the Measuring Cell is factory-set, and is depen-
dent on the stream temperature. To verify the default temperature
setpoint for the Probe, refer to the Default Probe Temp value indicated on
the Analyzer Programming Parameters sheet included in the “Supplement
Information” tab of this manual, or the Documentation Package shipped
with the analyzer.

The Measuring Cell can be configured to measure in four different ranges


(see “Measuring Cell Temperature Range, JP300” configuration). The
ranges are selectable via a jumper on the Micro-Interface board (see
“Installing the Optical Bench Assembly” in Chapter 3) and changes in the
software. When the temperature measuring range of the Measuring Cell is
changed through the software, jumpers on the Micro-Interface board
must be changed according to the “Measuring Cell Temperature Range,
JP300” configuration. To verify the proper range setting for your analyzer,
refer to the Cell Temp RTD Range indicated on the Analyzer Program-
ming Parameters sheet included in the “Supplement Information” tab of
this manual, or the Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

Measuring Cell Temperature Range, JP300


(Micro-Interface Board)
Range Jumper Position Temperature Range
A (default) 1-2 5 °C to 65 °C
B 3-4 60 °C to 130 °C
C 5-6 125 °C to 195 °C
D 7-8 190 °C to 260 °C

Controller / User Interface | 4-31


Heated Acid Gas Probe Temperature Control (Optional)

The Heated Acid Gas Probe operating temperature is monitored and/or


controlled by the analyzer (control available only if the optional Heated
Acid Gas Probe is used). Control is accomplished using an RTD and
heater embedded in the Probe. The Probe temperature measuring range
is from 0 °C to 120 °C.

If the Heated Acid Gas Probe operating temperature falls below its Too
Cold setpoint, the analyzer will generate a “f: Probe temperature too low”
Fault alarm. If its operating temperature exceeds its Too Hot setpoint, the
analyzer will generate a “f: Probe temperature too high” Fault alarm. Both
of these Fault alarms will be displayed in the HC Scode alarm list on the
Status tab when they are set.

The Probe temperature control is protected by an independent over-


temperature circuit, with a trip temperature of 170 °C. The default tem-
perature setpoint for the Probe is factory-set, and is dependent on the
stream temperature. To verify the default temperature setpoint for the
Probe, refer to the Default Probe Temp value indicated on the Analyzer
Programming Parameters sheet included in the “Supplement Informa-
tion” tab of this manual, or the Documentation Package shipped with the
analyzer.

 For unheated Sample Probes (not controlled by the analyzer), if the


sample probe operating temperature falls below its Too Cold setpoint
NOTE
or exceeds its Too Hot setpoint a “w: Probe temperature too low”
Warning alarm will be set and displayed in the HC Scode alarm list
on the Status tab.

4-32 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Output Setup

The Output Setup dialog box (Figure 4-13) contains Current and Voltage
output assignments. Refer also to the “Customer Connections, I/O Board”
drawing (North American or European) in Chapter 3. To access this dialog
box, click Output from the Setup tab.

There are four independent isolated 4–20 mA DC outputs that can be


either self-powered or loop-powered. The user must provide the loop
supply for the loop-powered output.

There are also four 1000–5000 VDC outputs. The default signal assign-
ment is configured to meet the specifications of the end user. If either the
current or voltage output assignments need to be changed, click the
drop-down arrow beside the output and select a different assignment.

In addition to the usual capability of Zeroing and Spanning the V/I and
Voltage Outputs, you can also set them to a mid-scale level for diagnostic
purposes. The low end of each analog output range can be a non-zero
value.

Figure 4-13.
Output Setup dialog
box, with two streams.

Figure 4-13 shows species under Species Iout and Species Vout with
 a two-stream configuration. The “A:” and “B:” prefixes indicate
NOTE
Stream A and Stream B, respectively. If the system is set up for a
single-stream configuration, these prefixes are not shown here.

Channel# (1, 2, 3, 4) lists various parameters for each of the four analog
output channels.

Controller / User Interface | 4-33


Assignment
Defines (Output Signal Assignment, or OSA) code for each of the four
analog outputs. These are typically assigned at the factory, according
to customer specifications.

Species Iout is the gas type of interest for the current output.
You can assign a different species for each of the four channels.
Depending on the analyzer, certain options may not be available.
Options include Live H2S(%), Live Sensor 1(%), Live H2(%), Live
Sensor 3(%), T&H H2S(%), T&H Sensor 1(%), T&H H2(%), T&H
Sensor 3(%), and T&H H2S(%). N/A is selected if no output is
assigned to the channel.

Species Vout is the gas type of interest for the voltage output.
You can assign a different species for each of the four channels.
Depending on the analyzer, certain options may not be available.
Options include Live H2S(%), Live Sensor 1(%), Live H2(%), Live
Sensor 3(%), T&H H2S(%), T&H Sensor 1(%), T&H H2(%) and
T&H Sensor 3(%) T&H H2S(%). N/A is selected if no output is
assigned to the channel.

Current Outputs
Low Scale
Enter the current low scale set point corresponding to 4 mA DC,
for each of the analog outputs. If an output is not used, set this
parameter to zero (0).

Full Scale (High Scale)


Enter the current full (high) scale set point corresponding to
20 mA DC, for each analog output. If an output is not used, set
this parameter to zero (0). For example, if Scale 1 = 1000 PPM,
Output 1 would read 20 mA at 1000 PPM and 4 mA at 0 PPM.
These outputs are application-specific.

Zero (mA)
Enter the measured current (mA) in the current output loop when
the output is set to zero scale during the Zero calibration proce-
dure, for each analog output. The actual mA value is displayed for
each corresponding output channel when 4 mA (Zero function) is
activated. This is factory-calibrated.

Span (mA)
Enter the measured full-scale current (mA) in the current output
loop when the output is set to full-scale during the Span calibra-
tion procedure, for each of the analog outputs. The actual mA
value is displayed next to the corresponding output channel when
20 mA (Span function) is activated. This is factory-calibrated.

Result
Displays the real time output value for each output.

4-34 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Voltage Outputs

Low Scale
Enter the voltage low scale set point corresponding to 1000 mV
DC, for each of the analog outputs. If an output is not used, set
this parameter to zero (0).

Full Scale (High Scale)


Enter the voltage full (high) scale set point corresponding to 5000
mV DC, for each of the analog outputs. If an output is not used,
set this parameter to zero (0).

Zero (mV)
Enter the measured voltage output when the analog output is set
to zero scale during the Zero calibration procedure for a voltage
output.

Span (mV)
Enter the measured voltage output when the analog output is set
to full-scale during the Span calibration procedure for a voltage
output.

Result
Displays the real time output value for each output.

Normal button
Current and Voltage outputs track the analyzer displayed output. The
status of this function is ON/OFF.

Mid-Scale button
Sets the current outputs to 12 mA and the voltage outputs to 3000
mV for calibration verification. The status of this function is ON/OFF.

Zero Cal button


Sets the current outputs to 4 mA and the voltage outputs to 1000 mV
for zero calibration. The status of this function is ON/OFF.

Span Cal button


Sets the current outputs to 20 mA and the voltage outputs to 5000
mV for span calibration. The status of this function is ON/OFF.

Apply button
Saves the changes you made to the Assignment parameters and the
values you entered in any of the Current Outputs and Voltage Out-
puts text boxes.

Refresh button
Reverts the changes you made on this screen back to their original
settings, but only before you click OK to exit this screen.

Controller / User Interface | 4-35


Sensors Setup

The Sensors dialog box (Figure 4-14) displays configuration parameters


for optional sensors used by the analyzer. The parameters displayed here
are the results of settings in the analyzer. To access this dialog box, click
Sensors from the Setup tab.

Hazardous Locations:
! To comply with the requirements of the hazardous location certifica-
WARNING
tion for the sensors, do not operate these sensors in a hazardous
location at a pressure greater than 825 mmHg (1.1 BAR or 16 PSIA).

Figure 4-14.
Sensors dialog box
(Model 932).

Sensor
Displays the names of available, factory-set sensors – Sensor 1, 2, 3
(e.g., H2 for hydrogen).

Span Conc
This is the concentration of the component (PPM or %) in the calibra-
tion gas mixture, for each sensor. The concentration is entered in
decimal notation. The maximum concentration which can be entered
is 999 999. If a calibration gas is not used, this value must be set to
zero (0).

SFactor
The Span (calibration) Factor for the calculated result (component
concentration), for each sensor. The analyzer’s Span Factor is adjusted
automatically at the completion of a span.

4-36 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


AIN Offset (duty cycle)
This is the current duty cycle for Sensor 2 and Sensor 3 (analog
inputs) during steady-state operation at the set point. The software
will adjust these values while the sensor is being zeroed. These values
are also displayed on the Analog Inputs dialog box (External Sensor
Input Offset).

Enable Sensor Result Cal


Enables the calibration function for each of the external sensors and
activates the sensors and their results. When a sensor is enabled for
calibration, its binary code sum value (i.e., 2 = Sensor 2) is displayed
in the display box to the right of these check boxes.

ManSpan buttons
Allow the user to manually span the analyzer for each component
being measured by its corresponding sensor (must be enabled under
Enable Sensor Result Cal). The analyzer calibration is automatically
adjusted based on the average reading during the Integration Timer
period after clicking the corresponding ManSpan button.

The Span1 CAL, Span2 CAL, and Zero CAL solenoids are config-
ured (at the factory) on the Alarm Setting and Stream Switch
Parameters dialog box (under Flow Operation).

UV Result Compensation

Selection** Allows the user to select which sample


stream gas the sensor output will be com-
pensated for (Sensor 1, 2, 3 – e.g., H2 for
hydrogen).

This function is provided for high concen-


tration applications only, where a stream gas
may interfere with sensor measurement due
to thermal conductivity characteristics
(generally not required.)

Factor** Determines the level of compensation


applied to the sensor output (Sensor 1, 2, 3
– e.g., H2 for hydrogen).

Cancel Calibration button


Aborts the manual calibration sequence (ManSpan1, ManSpan2,
ManSpan3).

Controller / User Interface | 4-37


Sensor 2 (thermal conductivity sensor)

Cell Pressure (mmHg)** Displays the Measuring Cell pressure


recorded by the analyzer during the last
Zero. This parameter is automatically
adjusted. Also used for factory calibration.

Signal Reading (mV)** Displays the mV reading recorded by the


analyzer during the last Zero. This param-
eter is automatically adjusted during sensor
calibration.

Interference Gas Concentrations (%)

Zero Gases The zero gas composition can contain up to


three different gases: a balance gas and two
other principle gases. This function allows
the user to enter the gas concentration
values for each zero gas (Gas 1 and Gas 2).

If instrument air or nitrogen is used as the


zero gas, the concentration of Gas 1 and
Gas 2 should be set to zero (0 = default).

Process Gases The process gas pressure will be measured


using the internal pressure transducer;
alternatively, a static pressure will be used.

For optimal zero offset corrections, the user


should enter the concentration of each gas
(Gas 1 and Gas 2) from the process.

Constants These factory-set parameters perform


(static) corrections for Sensor 2.

Alpha is used to correct the gas concentra-


tion reading from Sensor 2 (thermal conduc-
tivity) for the effect of pressure changes.

Beta is used to correct the gas concentration


reading from Sensor 2 (thermal conductiv-
ity) for cross-talk from Gas 1.

4-38 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Gamma is used to correct the gas concen-
tration reading from Sensor 2 (thermal
conductivity) for cross-talk from Gas 2.

S-H2 is the linear factor used to scale the


gas concentration reading from the mV
reading of the thermal conductivity sensor.

Q-H2 is a nonlinear factor used to scale the


gas concentration reading from the mV
reading of the thermal conductivity sensor.

Display
During normal operation, these message lines display the real-time
status of the species being measured. The species is displayed on the
top line and the concentration value is displayed on the bottom line.

When an Auto-Setup function is in progress, a message indicating the


current stage of the Auto-Setup function is displayed on the top line
(the concentration value continues to be displayed on the bottom
line). This information is also displayed on other dialog boxes and
tabs.

During normal conditions, the text is Green; when there is a Warning


or Fault alarm present, the text is Red. If an alarm is present, refer to
the “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting” section in Chapter 6 for details
about the alarm and corrective action to take to reset the alarm.

Controller / User Interface | 4-39


Modbus Settings

The Modbus dialog box (Figure 4-15) displays current communication


parameters for the analyzer you are communicating with. The parameters
displayed here are the results of settings in the analyzer. To access this
dialog box, click Modbus from the Setup tab.

Figure 4-15.
Modbus dialog box.

Address
Displays and allows you to select the Modbus slave address assigned
to the analyzer.

Baud Rate
Displays and allows you to select the baud rate.

Stop Bits
Displays and allows you to select the number of stop bits.

Parity
Displays and allows you to select the parity of the Modbus network.

The field at the bottom of this dialog box (i.e., RTU 9600 N 8) represents
the current settings.

4-40 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Matrix

The Matrix dialog box is used only for the Model 932 Multi-Gas
 Analyzer. For the Model 931 Single-Gas Analyzer; the Matrix button
NOTE
is grayed out, this function is not available.

The Matrix dialog box (Figure 4-16) displays information that is respon-
sible for partially calculating the concentration output and negating the
effects of cross-talk by interfering gas species. To access this dialog box,
click Matrix from the Setup tab.

Figure 4-16.
Matrix dialog box
(Model 932).

 ‘**’ following the description name indicates the parameter is used


primarily for diagnosing problems with the analyzer; therefore,
NOTE
these parameters should only be modified by a trained technician.

Species**
This designates which gas species are currently configured for each
row (up to six).

Row/Filter**
This displays the value for each species of gas (Row 1–6) and each
column (Filter 1–6) in the calculation matrix.

Controller / User Interface | 4-41


Analytical Parameters

The Analytical Parameters dialog box is used only for the Model 932
 Multi-Gas Analyzer. For the Model 931 Single-Gas Analyzer, the
NOTE
Analytical Parameters button is grayed out; this function is not
available.

Figure 4-17.
Analytical Parameters
dialog box (Model 932).

 ‘**’ following the description name indicates the parameter is used


primarily for diagnosing problems with the analyzer; therefore,
NOTE
these parameters should only be modified by a trained technician.

Linear Coefficients
This is the calibration parameters used for factory calibration. The
displayed results may vary, depending on the application.

Linearization c0–c6**
This displays the factory-set linearization coefficients that are used to
provide polynomial correction in the data analysis.

4-42 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Analog Inputs

The Analog Inputs dialog box (Figure 4-18) allows you to configure
various parameters for the analog inputs associated with the analyzer. To
access this dialog box, click Analog Inputs from the Setup tab.

Figure 4-18.
Analog Inputs dialog
box.

 ‘**’ following the description name indicates the parameter is used


primarily for diagnosing problems with the analyzer; therefore,
NOTE
these parameters should only be modified by a trained technician.

Analog Input Measurement Parameters** (factory-set)


Allows you to assign analog inputs for measurements and to set
calibration parameters.

Channel Assignment Defines the signal (e.g., Cell Pres) assigned


to each analog channel (up to six).

Low Displays the factory-set offset low range.

High Displays the factory-set offset high range.

Measurement Displays the signal levels.

The following signal is assigned to the analog input Channel Assign-


ment.
Cell Pres** Displays the real-time absolute pressure for
the Measuring Cell (mmHg). Factory-set.
Also used for factory calibration.

Apply button Applies the changes you made to these


values.

Controller / User Interface | 4-43


Raw Data
Displays a value that has been digitally converted from an analog
input measurement.

External Sensor Input Offsets


Allows you to enter a value (10–90 %) for the input offsets for two
external sensor inputs (2 and 3). This function is factory-calibrated.
After entering an offset value, click the Apply button to save the
changes.

Refresh button
Reverts the changes you made on this screen back to their original
settings, but only before you click OK to exit this screen.

4-44 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Setting Gas Calibration Parameters

The Gas Calibration dialog box (Figure 4-19) contains gas species infor-
mation and sample system control parameters. To access this dialog box,
click Gas Calibration from the Setup tab.

Figure 4-19.
Gas Calibration dialog
box (Model 932).

Result Code
Each of these factory-set Result Codes corresponds to a specific
species. Result Codes are used to define outputs.

Species
Displays the names of available, factory-set gas species/output set-
tings.

Span Conc
This is the concentration of the component (PPM or %) in the calibra-
tion gas mixture. The concentration is entered in decimal notation.
The maximum concentration which can be entered is 999 999. If a
calibration gas is not used, this value must be set to zero (0).

SFactor
The Span (calibration) Factor for the calculated result (component
concentration) for each configured gas species. The analyzer’s Span
Factor is adjusted automatically at the completion of a span.

ZCalDriftSpec
At the end of every Auto-Zero or Manual Zero, the zero drift result is
calculated and displayed (PPM).

Controller / User Interface | 4-45


Manual CAL
This group includes the control options that allow you to perform
manual calibration functions on the analyzer.

ManSpan buttons Allow the user to manually span the ana-


lyzer for each component. The analyzer
calibration is automatically adjusted based
on the average reading during the Integra-
tion Timer period after clicking the corre-
sponding ManSpan button.

The Span1 CAL, Span2 CAL, and Zero CAL


solenoids are configured (at the factory) on
the Alarm Setting and Stream Switch
Parameters dialog box (under Flow Opera-
tion).

ManZero button Allows the user to manually zero the ana-


lyzer. The analyzer zero is automatically
adjusted based on the average reading
during the Integration Timer period after
clicking the ManZero button.

The Span1 CAL, Span2 CAL, and Zero CAL


solenoids are configured (at the factory) on
the Alarm Setting and Stream Switch
Parameters dialog box (under Flow Opera-
tion).

Auto CAL

AutoCAL button Initializes the analyzer to automatically


cycle sequentially through the Auto-Zero
and Auto-Span functions. Only the func-
tions with timers set to non-zero durations
are included.

The zero offset and calibration will be


automatically adjusted.

4-46 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


AutoZero button Initializes the analyzer to automatically
introduce Zero Gas into the sample system.

The Span1 CAL, Span2 CAL, and Zero


CAL solenoids are configured (at the
factory) on the Alarm Setting and Stream
Switch Parameters dialog box (under Flow
Operation). The solenoids turn on and off
automatically during the sequence.

The zero offset is a factory-set calculated


value that is adjusted based on the average
reading during the last 25 percent of the
AZ-0 timer (Timer0) duration.

An Auto-Zero sequence initiated on a timed basis or by a remote


 contact will not be executed if there is a fault alarm present.
NOTE

AutoSpan buttons Automatically introduce calibration gas into


the sample system.

The Span1 CAL, Span2 CAL, and Zero


CAL solenoids are configured (at the
factory) on the Alarm Setting and Stream
Switch Parameters dialog box (under Flow
Operation). The solenoids turn on and off
automatically during the sequence.

The analyzer calibration is automatically


adjusted based on the average reading
during the last 25 percent of the countdown
after clicking the appropriate AutoSpan
button.

For multi-component calibration gas mix-


tures (Model 932 Analyzers only), the same
solenoid can be assigned to different spe-
cies, but must be spanned individually.

Cancel Calibration button


Aborts the calibration sequence (Manual
Zero, Auto-Zero, Span).

Controller / User Interface | 4-47


Calibration Timers
Allows you to set up the timers used during calibration.

Manual Calibration Allows you to enter a time value (Default =


60 seconds) for the Integration Timer(sec),
during which the concentration reading for
each of the species is averaged. The Inte-
gration Timer may be set to a duration
from 0–65535 seconds.

Sample Delay (min) Allows you to enter a time value (in min-
utes) that sets the time delay for the AUTO/
MANUAL relay to continue indicating that a
calibration (Zero) is in progress after
completion of the Zero function. This
function also sets the time delay that the
Normal/Fault relay will wait before indicat-
ing the fault alarm has been cleared. This
allows for a smooth transition from the
Zero/Span Gas back to the sample gas. The
delay can be set from 0–255 minutes. Setting
the delay to zero (0) turns the function off.

Auto Calibration Timers


Allows you to enter a time value (in minutes) for the Auto-Zero
and three Auto-Span timers.

AZ-0 Allows you to enter a value (duration, in


minutes) that defines the amount of time
that the solenoid combination is active
during an Auto-Zero function. The time
may be set from 0–255 minutes. Entering a
value of zero (0) turns the timer off.

AS-1, AS-2, AS-3 Allows you to enter a value (duration, in


minutes) that defines the amount of time
that span solenoid combination is active
during an Auto-Span function. The time
may be set from 0–255 minutes (default = 4
minutes). Entering a value of zero (0) turns
these timers off.

4-48 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


AZero Interval The Auto-Zero Interval timer field allows
you to enter a time value (in hours) that
controls the interval between Auto-Zero
sequences. The interval can be set from
0–999. Entering a value of zero (0) turns the
timer off, disabling a timed start of the Auto-
Zero sequence.

The Auto-Zero function will be included in


the Auto-Calibration sequence if Auto-Zero
is enabled and Timer0 duration is not zero.

ACAL Interval The Auto-Calibration timer allows you to


enter a time value (in hours) that controls
the interval between Auto-Calibration
sequences. The interval can be set from
0–999 hours (default = 0 hours). Entering a
value of zero (0) turns the timer off, dis-
abling a timed start of the Auto-Calibration
Zero sequence.

Display
During normal operation, these message lines display the real-time
status of the species being measured. The species is displayed on the
top line and the concentration value is displayed on the bottom line.

When an Auto-Setup function is in progress, a message indicating the


current stage of the Auto-Setup function is displayed on the top line
(the concentration value continues to be displayed on the bottom
line). This information is also displayed on other dialog boxes and
tabs.

During normal conditions, the text is Green; when there is a Warning


or Fault alarm present, the text is Red. If an alarm is present, refer to
the “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting” section in Chapter 6 for
details about the alarm and corrective action to take to reset the
alarm.

Controller / User Interface | 4-49


Flow Control
This is the analyzer sample gas flow control mode. For normal opera-
tions, the analyzer operates in the Auto-mode (automatic analyzer
control). Other Flow Control modes are set manually by the user.

The Flow Control modes, listed in the Flow Control Legend, vary for
different analyzers. The analyzer will operate in the corresponding
Flow Control mode code that is entered in the Flow Control Mode
text field below the Flow Control Legend. After entering a Flow
Control mode code, click the Apply button (next to the Flow Con-
trol text field) to save the change and set the analyzer into the new
Flow Control mode.

0 = auto
Enter this code to enable the analyzer to automatically determine and
set the mode of operation (either sample or shut-in) by monitoring
the state of the Fault alarm relay contacts. Upon analyzer start-up
and during Fault alarm condition, the analyzer will automatically
shut down the flow.

1 = shut-in/off
Enter this code to manually shut off the flow of sample gas through
the sample system. In this mode, the analyzer is under user control.

2 = zero
Enter this code to manually force the analyzer to continuously zero
the analyzer sample system with zero gas.

3 = span1
Enter this code to manually force the analyzer to continuously
backpurge its sample system with Span Gas1.

4 = span2
Enter this code to manually force the analyzer to continuously
backpurge its sample system with Span Gas2.

5 = stream A
Enter this code to manually force the analyzer to switch to sampling
from Stream A.

6 = stream B
Enter this code to manually force the analyzer to switch to sampling
from Stream B.

7 = sample
Enter this code to manually force the analyzer to continuously
sample.

Apply button Applies the changes you made to the Flow


Control mode.

4-50 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Alarm Setting and Stream Switch Parameters

The Alarm Setting and Stream Switch Parameters dialog box (Figure
4-20) contains gas species information and sample system control param-
eters. To access this dialog box, click Alarm/Stream Switch from the
Setup tab.

Figure 4-20.
Alarm Setting and
Stream Switch
Parameters dialog box
(Model 932).

Species to Auto-Span Mapping

Species Defines the species to be auto-spanned.


This is a calibration function, and is related
to the parameters on the Gas Calibration
dialog box.

Span 1 The available options will vary, depending


on the application.

Span 2 The available options will vary, depending


on the application. This parameter will also
accommodate AutoSpan2 for sensor calibra-
tion.

Controller / User Interface | 4-51


Alarm Settings
Defines the parameters for the concentration alarms that are dis-
played on the Status tab.

Concentration Alarm 1 is user defined.


Concentration Alarm 2 is for concentration alarms.
These are both for concentration alarms and both are user-
defined.

Result Assignment This defines a species for each concentra-


tion alarm.

If N/A is selected, the Concentration 1 and


Concentration 2 relays are used for
Stream A and Stream B, respectively. These
relays (whether used for Concentration 1/2
or Stream A/B) and their status are dis-
played on the Status tab.

Assignments will vary, depending on the


analyzer and application.

On-threshold This is the value at which the Concentra-


tion Alarm will be triggered on.

Off-threshold This is the value at which the Concentra-


tion Alarm will be reset, unless Enable
latching is checked (enabled).

Time delay(sec) This is the duration, in seconds, that the


Concentration Alarm will be delayed before
it is triggered.

Enable latching check box

Checked The activated warning relay will latch (will


not clear) until the user disables the con-
centration alarms by clicking the Conc.
Alarm Soft Enable On/Off button on the
Status tab.
Not Checked The relay will automatically return to its
non-alarm state once the concentration
falls below the concentration Off-threshold
value.

4-52 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Enable latching of fail alarm check box
Checked The activated fault alarm relay will latch
(will not clear) until the user disables the
concentration alarms by clicking the Conc.
Alarm Soft Enable On/Off button on the
Status tab.
Not Checked The fault alarm relay will automatically
return to its non-alarm state once the fault
condition has been corrected.

Stream Switching (optional – available only if analyzer is equipped with


stream switching function)

The Stream Switching settings are made at the factory and should
 not be changed.
NOTE

Single Stream Select this if there is only one stream being


sampled from. The Switching Interval
(sec) must be set to zero (0). When this
function is selected, all other Stream
Switching parameters are disabled.

Two Streams Select this if there are two streams being


sampled from. The Switching Interval
(sec) must be set to a value greater than ‘3’.
When this function is selected, set up
related Stream Switching parameters as
required.

Switching Control Options include:


0 = Auto (stream switching is performed
automatically by the analyzer, at the
Switching Interval value).
1 = Digital input (switching can be per-
formed via a control station using the
digital input).
2 = Modbus (switching can be performed
via a Distributed Control System or
Programmable Logic Controller via
Modbus protocol). When this func-
tion is selected, Stream Selection is
enabled; choose the appropriate
option. The Switching Interval (sec)
must be set to zero (0).

Controller / User Interface | 4-53


Stream Selection This function can be controlled by Modbus
communication. Options include:
-1 = none
0 = stream A
1 = stream B
Selecting ‘0’ (stream A) or ‘1’ (stream B)
enables Switching Interval.

Switching Interval (sec) This is the time (3–1200 seconds) between


stream switches. For single streams, this
function must be set to zero (0).
Flow Operation
This function allows the user to configure each Solenoid (Z, B, A).
Assignment indicates which analyzer Flow Control mode is enabled
for each of the calibration parameters.
ZeroCAL Combination of solenoids activated during
Zero gas flow.
Span1CAL Combination of solenoids activated during
Span1 gas flow.
Span2CAL Combination of solenoids activated during
Span2 gas flow (Model 932 Analyzers only).
Sample Stream A Combination of solenoids activated when
stream A is selected from the Stream
Selection list.
Sample Stream B Combination of solenoids activated when
stream B is selected from the Stream
Selection list.
Assignment This is a code representing the solenoid
combination.
Flow Switch Alarm
This function allows the user to set up the conditions for the Low
flow detected alarm.
Alarm Type Allows the user to set the type of alarm that
will be displayed when a flow switching
error is detected. Options include:
0 = warning (data is suspect; analyzer
requires service)
1 = fault (data is invalid; serious failure
detected; sample system switches to
shut-in/off mode)
Activation Time Delay (sec)
This is the duration, in seconds, that the
Flow Switch Alarm will be delayed before it
is triggered.

4-54 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Analyzer Information

Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
! gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.
WARNING
Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communi-
cations Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power
up the laptop computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere
present.

Figure 4-21.
Analyzer Information
dialog box (Model 932).

The Info dialog box (Figure 4-21) displays information about the analyzer
and allows you to reset the analyzer’s Host Controller board. To access
this dialog box, click Analyzer Info from the Setup tab.

Host Version
Displays Host Controller board software version.

Micro Version
Displays Microcontroller board software version.

Serial #
Displays analyzer serial number.

EEPROM Writes
Displays number of times that new configuration data has been
saved to the analyzer’s EEPROM. The maximum allowable number
of saves is 20,000.

Controller / User Interface | 4-55


Serial Number Update
Used to re-enter the analyzer’s serial number (to correspond with the
analyzer data) after replacing the analyzer’s embedded software
(EPROMs) or EEPROM (described under the section “Restoring
Analyzer Configuration Parameters,” earlier in this chapter).

Model ID
Displays a code (see Analyzer Legend, below) that the software uses
to define the AMETEK analyzer model the software is currently
communicating with (not user-adjustable). Analyzer models include:
151 = 0x97 = M931 (Model 931 Analyzer)
152 = 0x98 = M932 (Model 932 Analyzer)

Display
During normal operation, these message lines display the real-time
status of the species being measured. The species is displayed on the
top line and the concentration value is displayed on the bottom line.

When an Auto-Setup function is in progress, a message indicating the


current stage of the Auto-Setup function is displayed on the top line
(the concentration value continues to be displayed on the bottom
line). This information is also displayed on other dialog boxes and
tabs.

During normal conditions, the text is Green; when there is a Warning


or Fault alarm present, the text is Red. If an alarm is present, refer to
the “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting” section in Chapter 6 for details
about the alarm and corrective action to take to reset the alarm.

Refresh button
Reverts any values that you have modified back to their original
settings, but only before you select an Update button or OK. When
you click this button, any values that you have changed but do not
wish to set permanently will revert to the settings that were last saved
to the system’s EEPROM.

HC Reset button
Resets the analyzer’s Host Controller board.

4-56 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Status Tab
The Status tab (Figure 4-22) allows you to view live data results of the
selected outputs, plus the Fault and Warning conditions (current and
historical) associated with the HC Scode (Host Controller Status Code)
and MC Scode (Microcontroller Status Code). You can also view the
current status of various analyzer control functions from this tab. This
screen is particularly useful when performing analyzer diagnostics.
Information on this tab is not user-adjustable.

Figure 4-22.
Status tab (Model 932).

System Status Messages along the top portion of this screen display
information about the System 200 Configurator Software and the
analyzer. These include:

Analyzer Status
Displays the communication status between the System 200
Configurator Software and the analyzer. Messages that can appear
here include: Online, OFFLINE, DISABLED, Wrong Device (if the
analyzer cannot be recognized), or DEMO.

Host Runtime
This is the amount of time the Host Controller board has been
performing controls since the analyzer was last powered up or
reset.

Micro Runtime
This is the amount of time the Microcontroller board has been
performing controls since the analyzer was last powered up or
reset.

Controller / User Interface | 4-57


Host Controller Board software version
Displayed next to Host Runtime (i.e., HC/93x Vx.xx). This informa-
tion will be displayed only if the System 200 Configurator Soft-
ware is communicating with the analyzer.

Microcontroller Board software version


Displayed next to Micro Runtime (i.e., MC93x Vx.xx). This infor-
mation will be displayed only if the System 200 Configurator
Software is communicating with the analyzer.

SN#
Analyzer’s serial number. This information will be displayed only
if the System 200 Configurator Software is communicating with
the analyzer.

Calibration/Solenoid Status
Located in the upper-right corner of this dialog box, this displays
the current status of the calibration functions and the current
status of the solenoids.

Calibration Status
The status of the calibration functions is displayed on the top
line of this display. Depending on which calibration function is
in progress, one of the following messages is displayed: Auto-
CAL, Auto-Zero, Auto-span1, Auto-span2 (Model 932 only),
Manual-zero, Manual-span1, Manual-span2 (Model 932 only).

If no calibration is in progress, this line will be blank.

Solenoid Status
The status of the solenoids is displayed on the second line of
this display. Solenoids Z, B, and A are always displayed, but
their ON/OFF status will change, depending on their opera-
tion.

HC Scode
Displays active alarm conditions that originate from the Host Control-
ler board. Each alarm condition is preceded by its status number,
followed by the type of alarm (Fault or Warning), and the alarm
description. The sum of their respective primary codes is listed in the
‘f’ault and ‘w’arning fields next to HC Scode.

 For a complete list of alarms generated by the Host Controller


board, refer to the “Maintenance & Troubleshooting” chapter.
NOTE

4-58 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


MC Scode
Displays active alarm conditions that originate from the
Microcontroller board. Each alarm condition is preceded by its status
number, followed by the type of alarm (Fault or Warning), and the
alarm description. The sum of their respective primary codes is listed
in the ‘f’ault and ‘w’arning fields next to MC Scode.

 For a complete list of alarms generated by the Microcontroller board,


refer to the “Maintenance & Troubleshooting” chapter.
NOTE

Scode History
These readings are history buffers for the Host Controller (HC Scode)
and Microcontroller (MC Scode) boards, for the last five measuring
cycles. Each history buffer displays a status code (if any alarms have
been set), which is a sum of the primary error codes, where ‘1’ is the
most recent status code and ‘5’ is the oldest. To resolve a non-primary
status code into its primary error codes, click on the history buffer
fault or warning status code. The alarms that make up the status code
will be displayed under the HC Scode or MC Scode alarm lists.

Display
During normal operation, these message lines display the real-time
status of the species being measured. The species is displayed on the
top line and the concentration value is displayed on the bottom line.

When an Auto-Setup function is in progress, a message indicating the


current stage of the Auto-Setup function is displayed on the top line
(the concentration value continues to be displayed on the bottom
line). This information is also displayed on other dialog boxes and
tabs.

During normal conditions, the text is Green; when there is a Warning


or Fault alarm present, the text is Red. If an alarm is present, refer to
the “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting” section in Chapter 6 for
details about the alarm and corrective action to take to reset the
alarm.

Calculated Results
Located to the right of the HC Scode and MC Scode History buffers,
the existing results and values are displayed. The value for each
result will be displayed and updated at one-second intervals.
Conc Displays the current concentration for each compo-
nent displayed to the left of this column.

Controller / User Interface | 4-59


Analyzer system
The current operational status of the analyzer:

Startup shut-in The analyzer has shut off the flow of


sample gas through the sample system
during its start-up sequence.
Startup time delay This delay period, activated at analyzer
power-up or reset, allows time for the
analyzer to stabilize prior to operation. This
parameter is not user-adjustable.
Operational The analyzer is operating normally (sam-
pling gas).
Alarm clearing The analyzer is clearing an alarm after the
alarm has been corrected.
Conc. Alarm Hard Enable Input
The current status of the Concentration Alarm Hard Enable function,
either Enabled or Disabled. This input is made via a jumper on the
hardware (Customer I/O board, at J101).

Conc. Alarm Soft Enable


The current status of the Concentration Alarm Soft Enable function,
either Enabled or Disabled. The On/Off button allows you to enable
(turn on) or disable (turn off) this function by clearing latched Con-
centration Alarms.

Wheel Speed (rpm)


The current optical bench filter wheel speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM). Applies to Model 932 Analyzers only.

Remote ACal
The current status of the remote, dry (potential free) contact, either
OFF (closed) or ON (open). When start is displayed, the remote auto-
calibration function has been initiated from a remote control room,
such as a Data Acquisition System (DAS).

Concentration Alarm 1 (or Stream A)


Concentration Alarm 2 (or Stream B)
The current status of the Concentration Alarms (Alarm 1 and Alarm 2),
either ON or OFF. The ON status indicates that one (or both) of the
Concentration Alarms has exceeded its On-Threshold (trip-point)
value and Off-Threshold (alarm clear) value.

If the Concentration Alarms are disabled, the status of Stream A and


Stream B will be displayed here, either ON or OFF. The Concentration
Alarms are disabled if Result Assignment (on the Alarm Setting and
Stream Switch Parameters dialog box) is set to 0-N/A.

4-60 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Warning Relay
The current status of the Warning Status relay. When the analyzer is
operating in its normal Run state, this relay is energized. This relay is
de-energized if a warning alarm condition exists within the analyzer’s
built-in diagnostic system (the analyzer requires attention). The
Warning contacts will also become de-energized if you manually force
the analyzer’s Flow Control Mode to any mode other than Analyzer
(auto) Control.

Resetting of the contacts is delayed by the Sample Delay Timer dura-


tion; otherwise, this relay’s contacts reset automatically upon correc-
tion of the warning alarm or upon switching back to Analyzer Control
Mode.

Fault Relay
When the analyzer is operating in its normal Run state, this relay is
energized. This relay is de-energized if a fault alarm condition exists
within the analyzer’s built-in diagnostic system (the analyzer requires
service).

When a fault alarm condition exists (relay is de-energized), the sample


system Flow Control mode will automatically switch to “zero” mode if
the analyzer’s Flow Control Mode is set to “auto” (Analyzer Control
Mode).

If the relay is configured to latch (default) it will not clear unless the
user manually resets the alarm; if not, it will reset automatically upon
correction of the fault alarm.

Whenever a fault alarm condition exists, the text on the Display


message lines on the Optical Bench, Gas Calibration, and Info dialog
boxes, and Status and Analyzer Data tabs will turn Red to indicate a
fault status.

Conc. Alarm Valid (Relay)


Indicates whether the Concentration Alarm is Valid or not (Invalid).

 To back out of this screen or to view or set up other system informa-


tion, choose another tab. Clicking OK or Cancel will take you back to
NOTE
the Configurator Software main window. You will have to re-establish
computer-analyzer communications (select Device Properties
from the Edit menu).

Controller / User Interface | 4-61


Analyzer Data Tab
This tab (Figure 4-23) displays live data results of up to six species of
gases plus other components, depending on which model of analyzer
you are working with. You can also view live data results of each tem-
perature-controlled zone, analog inputs/outputs, and digital inputs/
outputs. This screen is particularly useful when performing diagnostics
on the analyzer. Information on this tab is not user-adjustable.

Figure 4-23.
Analyzer Data tab
(Model 932).

Results
Displays the real-time calculated result of each species of gas being
measured (one for Model 931 Analyzers; up to six for Model 932
Analyzers). The results, which will vary from analyzer to analyzer, are
updated at one second intervals. The results for the analyzer you are
communicating with will be displayed on this screen.

This information is also displayed in the Display field on the Optical


Bench, Gas Calibration, and Info dialog boxes, and Status tab.

Temperature Zones
Displays the real time Temperature (°C) and Duty Cycle (%) of each
temperature-controlled zone:

• Bench (Optical Bench)

• Cell (Measuring Cell)

• Probe (Heated Acid Gas Probe) – optional

4-62 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Analog Outputs
Displays the assigned analog output name (up to four) and its real
time status. If no output is assigned to a channel, “none” will be
displayed next to the channel number (for example, “4 – none”). The
outputs will be different for each analyzer/application.

I - Output Displays the analog current output.

V - Output Displays the analog voltage output.

Countdown timers

Time to next auto-zero(min)


The amount of time until the next Auto-Zero starts. Minus 1 (-1)
indicates timed Auto-Zero is disabled.
Time to next auto-cal(min)
The amount of time until the next Auto-Calibration starts. Minus 1
(-1) indicates timed Auto-Calibration is disabled.
Time to end of cal(sec)
The amount of time left in the Calibration Integration Timer (see
Integration Timer on the Gas Calibration dialog box). Minus 1 (-1)
indicates no gas calibration is in progress.
Time to next stream(sec)
The amount of time left until the next stream switch. Minus 1 (-1)
indicates stream switching is deactivated.
Analog Inputs
Displays the assigned analog input name (up to eight) and its real
time status. If no input is assigned to a channel, no information is
displayed. The inputs will be different for each analyzer/application.

Ch # Defines the input code assigned to each analog input


channel.

Raw Displays the real-time digitally converted analog input


values.

Scaled/Input Name
Displays the scaled, real-time Measuring Cell pressure
reading.

Controller / User Interface | 4-63


Digital IO
Displays the real time status of the digital inputs/outputs.

DIN Displays the real time status of up to four digital


inputs:

Auto-cal request – Displays the status (OFF [open]/


START [closed]) of the Auto-Calibration Request Input.

Conc. alarm hard-enable – Displays the status (Enabled


[closed]/Disabled [open]) of the Concentration Alarm
Hard Enable Input.

Stream selection input – Displays the status


([Stream A] A open/[Stream B] B closed) for the Stream
Selection Input.

Flow switch input – Displays the status (Normal


[open]/Low or no flow [closed]) for the Stream Selec-
tion Input.

Relay Displays the real time status of the analyzer’s relays:

Conc. alarm invalid relay (Invalid/Valid)

Warning relay (Warning/Normal)

Fault relay (Fault/Normal)

Solenoid Control Bits


Displays the real time status of the solenoids (A, B, Z).

 To back out of this screen or to view or set up other system informa-


tion, choose another tab. Clicking OK or Cancel will take you back to
NOTE
the Configurator Software main window. You will have to re-establish
computer-analyzer communications (select Device Properties from
the Edit menu).

4-64 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Optical Bench Data Tab
The Optical Bench Data tab (Figure 4-24) allows you to view live data
results from various signals that originate from each filter in the Optical
Bench. This dialog box is particularly useful when performing diagnostics
on the analyzer. Information on this tab is not user-adjustable.

For Model 931 Analyzers, only Filter 1 and Filter 2 information will
 be displayed; for Model 932 Analyzers, information for all six filters
NOTE
will be displayed.

Figure 4-24.
Optical Bench Data
tab (Model 932).

ALC Lamp Pulse (mV)


Displays the real time lamp pulse measurement of the Automatic
Lamp Control function, for each filter location.

PMT Measure (mV)


Displays the real time value of the Photomultiplier Tube Measure
voltage, for each filter location.

PMT Reference (mV)


Displays the real time value of the Photomultiplier Tube Reference
voltage, for each filter location.

Absorbance
Displays the real time absorbance values for each filter location.

Controller / User Interface | 4-65


Transmittance
Displays the real time transmittance values for each filter location.

Tzero
Displays the real time PMT signal transmittance value of each filter,
with Zero Gas in the sample system. It is adjusted automatically
whenever the analyzer is zeroed.

 To back out of this screen or to view or set up other system informa-


tion, choose another tab. Clicking OK or Cancel will take you back to
NOTE
the Configurator Software main window. You will have to re-establish
computer-analyzer communications (select Device Properties from
the Edit menu).

4-66 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Scanning Data
This section contains information on how to scan data and how to link
data from a different display. Data that is scanned on the analyzer can be
displayed on the screen in any of five formats or modes based on your
application. See Appendix A for detailed information on setting up modes
and defining their parameters.

 A configuration file has been included with the Configurator Soft-


ware.
NOTE

Before you can scan data, you must create a mode based on one of the
four predefined mode types, or create a custom mode that is made up of a
combination of the predefined modes (see “Display Modes” in this sec-
tion). For each mode you create or add to custom mode, you must assign
inputs to channels. Assigning inputs is described under “Defining Scan
Settings” in the following pages.

To create a Custom Mode configuration file:

1. From the File menu, select New. The Custom Mode toolbar is acti-
vated, allowing you to use the toolbar’s icons to create a custom setup.

You can set up the configuration file to view the:

• Trend graph of real-time concentration

• Track-and-hold concentration

• Measure and Reference PMT signals

• Analog inputs

2. Click Save Configuration from the File menu to save the file. The
Custom Mode file will be saved in the same directory in which the
Configurator Software has been installed.

Once the file is opened, click on the Standard Toolbar to start


data scanning.

Controller / User Interface | 4-67


Display Modes
• Meter Mode
Meter-type format. Alarms can be displayed to view current reading
relative to High and Low alarm limits.
• Annunciator Mode
Track whether a measured parameter is within acceptable user de-
fined limits using a simple color/text indication.
• Trend Mode
View trends of measured parameters.
• Tabular Mode
View information in a textual, table-type format.
• Custom Mode
Create custom setups to include a single mode display window or
multiple mode display windows.

Defining Scan Settings


Define the type of information you want to gather (scan) from the
selected device. This is done from the Scan tab of the Properties dialog
box (Figure 4-25). This example describes setting up a Trend mode.

Figure 4-25.
Scan tab (Trend mode
dialog box).

To define scan settings:

1. Right-click on the mode window and then click Scan from the
context menu to view the Trend Properties dialog box. The
Scan tab will be active.

 For Trend and Tabular modes, you must first select a Channel
before you can define scan settings.
NOTE

4-68 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


2. The buttons under Channels allow you to assign inputs to scan.
Inputs are assigned to each of these buttons from the Input
Channel list. To assign an input to a channel click the first (top)
button under Channels to select it.

3. Next, click Device under Data Source to select the device from
which to scan data. If only one device (analyzer) is being used,
only Dev1 will be displayed. When Device is selected, the Input
Channel list box is also displayed and enabled. From this list,
select a signal to assign to the channel.

To temporarily disable a channel, select it and then select Dis-


abled. Only that channel will be disabled.

4. Repeat Steps 2–3 to set up additional channels.

5. Data can also be linked from one window into another. This can
save scanning time since the system only needs to scan the data
one time. To link data from one window into another, use the Link
from function. To do this:

a. After inputs have been assigned to channels, click OK to return


to the mode window (or custom mode) you are setting up.

b. Select the display window that will receive the linked data
from another data source. The yellow border around the
window indicates it is selected.

c. Right-click over the display window and then click Scan from
the context menu that appears. The Link from function will
become enabled.

d. Select a data source to link from. To do this, select Link from


and then select the data source from the Link from list box.
The Link from list will depend on the inputs assigned to the
Channels in the mode you are working from. For example,
“Trend [Dev1: PMT Msr1]”. In this example, a channel has
been set up to scan the PMT Msr1 signal from the Trend mode.

 You cannot link data into a Bar mode window.


NOTE

6. Click OK when finished.

Controller / User Interface | 4-69


Starting a Scan

To start a scan, click or select Scan from the Control menu. The
message “Scanning” and the scanning progress will appear in the Status
Bar at the bottom of the window (if it has been enabled).

If you have scheduled scans at timed intervals and the system has fin-
ished a scan and is waiting to start the next scan, the time remaining
before the start of the next scan is displayed.

“Idle” is displayed in the Status Bar when the system is not scanning.

Stopping a Scan

Click or select Scan from the Control menu to toggle off the scan.

Scheduling Scans

Select Schedule from the Control menu or click on the Standard


Toolbar to view the Schedule dialog box (Figure 4-26).

Figure 4-26.
Schedule scans dialog
box.

Single Scan radio button


Select this to command the software to run a single scan when you

click . The system will stop scanning after one scan.

Continuous radio button


Select this to command the software to run scans at timed intervals

when you click .

4-70 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Scan Interval text field
Type a number to specify the time delay between scans. The unit this
number represents depends on whether the scans were scheduled
using Seconds or Minutes as the time interval.

Seconds Select this option to use seconds as the


interval between successive scans, as de-
fined by the number specified in the Scan
Interval text field.

Minutes Select this option to use minutes as the


interval between successive scans, as de-
fined by the number specified in the Scan
Interval text field.

Controller / User Interface | 4-71


Working With Data Files

Saving Data Files


Displayed information can be saved for later viewing or printing. Each
data record within a data file contains scan data from the display
window(s). Data records are created in serial format, as the data becomes
available from the system. A Custom mode, for example, will save each
display as a data record.

1. Select the display window or windows for which data will be saved.

• Hold down the Shift key and click on each window to be in-
cluded when selecting multiple display windows.

• Selecting a highlighted display window deselects the display


window.

• If no display window is selected, the software saves data for all


display windows in the mode.

2. From the File menu, select Save Data or click on the Data File
Toolbar to view the Save As dialog box (Figure 4-27). From here, you
can specify data file attributes.

Figure 4-27.
Save As dialog box.

4-72 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


3. Once the attributes are set, enter a name for the data file in the File
name text field and save it in a folder using standard Windows tech-
niques. Select the following (as required):

Save Now radio button


Prompts the system to save the most recent scanned data and then
stop scanning. If there are multiple Trend modes within a Custom
mode setup, only one can be selected for which to save data.

Start Saving radio button


Prompts the system to start saving data with the next scan and to
continue saving data files.

When File Full


Chooses how to handle cases in which the data file becomes
greater than 1 megabyte. A disk icon appears in the windows that
are selected to have data saved.

Stop radio button


Stops scanning when the file is full.

Start new file radio button


Save the data to a new file. The system automatically appends
consecutively numbered digits at the end of each new file it
creates so it is easier to follow the order in which the files were
created. Each file will be one megabyte in size so the data can be
copied to a disk.

4. To stop saving data, select Stop Saving from the File menu or click

on the Data File Toolbar.

Opening Data Files

1. From the File menu, select Open Data or click on the Data File
Toolbar.

2. Navigate to the location of the data file and select it.

3. Select Open. The data file appears on the screen. From here it can
either be viewed or printed.

Controller / User Interface | 4-73


Scrolling Through Data Records
From the File menu, select Data File Position or use the Data File Toolbar
to scroll forward and backward through the data file using the standard
recording symbols such as rewind or fast forward.

Converting Data Files


Use this utility to convert the analyzer Configurator Software data files
into ASCII text.

1. From the File menu, select Convert Data File and select one or more
data files.

2. Click Convert to convert and save the file with a CSV extension.

Printing Data
The Configurator Software will print scanning information in a format
similar to how it is displayed on the screen using the display parameters
created for that mode. You can view a preview of what will be printed by
selecting Print Preview from the File menu.

In Custom mode, the system prints the currently selected display win-
dow. If you do not select a display window, the system prints information
for each display window using the required number of pages.

To print data:

1. Select the display window(s) to be printed. If a window is not selected,


the entire screen will be printed. To select multiple windows, hold
down the Shift key while selecting each window.

2. From the File menu, select Print or click .

3. Type a print-header comment in the Display Print dialog box. This


information appears in the title of the printed pages. Click OK.

4. If you select Print from the File menu, a standard Windows Print
dialog box appears. Set the additional print information.

5. Click OK to print the scanning information.

4-74 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


CALIBRATION

Before proceeding to connect a device or power up a computer in a


! hazardous location, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
WARNING
gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communi-


cations Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power
up the computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

Manual Span Gas Calibration


The Gas Calibration dialog box (Figure 5-1) contains gas species infor-
mation and sample system control parameters. For more information on
setting up parameters, see the section called “Setting Gas Calibration
Parameters” in Chapter 4.

Figure 5-1.
Gas Calibration dialog
box (Model 932).

Calibration | 5-1
To perform a span gas calibration:

1. Perform an Auto-Zero function on the analyzer to automatically


adjust the analyzer zero. To initiate the auto-zero function, click the
AutoZero button. The zero offset is adjusted based on the average
reading during the Integration Timer duration at the end of the
Auto Calibration Timers (e.g., AZ-0) countdown.

2. Once the Auto Zero process is completed, record the zero gas pres-
sure setting and then turn off the zero gas.

PROCESS INSTRUMENTS

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT


DO NOT OPEN IF A HAZARDOUS
GAS ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT

MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN


8 7 6 5
12
9

11 10

1 2 3 4
SOLENOID BLOCK DETAIL
Figure 5-2.
Span gas and zero gas
inlet locations.

5-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


3. Remove the Swagelok cap from the Manual Calibration Gas Injection
fitting and connect the span gas tubing. See Figure 5-2 for a general
layout and refer to the Overall Component Layout drawing in-
cluded in the “Supplemental Information” tab of this manual, or in
the Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

4. Adjust the Cal Gas Regulator until the Cal Gas Pressure Gauge on the
analyzer backpan is at the recommended pressure listed on the
system drawings.

5. In the Flow Control text field, enter “2” (zero) and then click Apply
(next to the Flow Control text field). Click OK to return to the Setup
tab but do not click the Save CFG to EEPROM button (it is a tempo-
rary change only).

6. Adjust the Span Gas Regulator until the Span Gas Pressure Gauge on
the analyzer backpan is at the recommended pressure listed on the
system drawings.

7. In the Gas Calibration dialog box, change the Span concentration


value of the gas species to be calibrated to the actual span gas value
that is being used. Click OK to return to the Setup tab but do not
click the Save CFG to EEPROM button (it is a temporary change
only).

8. View the Analyzer Data tab (Figure 5-3) and observe the concentra-
tion readings.

Once the span concentration readings have stabilized, return to the Gas
Calibration dialog box and click the ManSpan button below the gas
species being calibrated. To check the time remaining for the span
function, observe the Time to end of cal(sec) timer under Countdown
timers on the Analyzer Data tab. You can also verify that the span
calibration is in progress by viewing Calibration/Solenoid Status field
in the upper-right corner of the Status tab. It should display “Manual-
span1” (can also display “Manual-span2” for Model 932 Analyzers
only).

At the completion of the span, confirm that the span factor reading
(SFactor, on the Gas Calibration dialog box) for the species is up-
dated. The default value for span factor is 1.0.

Calibration | 5-3
Figure 5-3.
Analyzer Data tab
(Model 932).

9. Bleed down the calibration gas and disconnect it from the span gas
connection point.

10. Replace and tighten the Swagelok cap on the span gas connection
point.

11. Turn on the zero gas and adjust the pressure to the level it was at
before performing procedure. Confirm that the pressure is at the
recommended pressure listed on the system drawings (located in the
“Supplemental Information” tab of this manual, and in the Docu-
mentation Package shipped with the analyzer).

12. Return the analyzer Flow Control mode to Analyzer (auto) Control
by entering “0” (auto) in the Flow Control text field, and then click-
ing Apply (next to the Flow Control text field). Click OK to return to
the Setup tab and then click the Save CFG to EEPROM button to
permanently save the changes to the analyzer’s EEPROM.

If the Flow Control mode (Gas Calibration dialog box, Figure 5-1)
 has been in a mode other than auto (0) for longer than the AZero
NOTE Interval (hr) duration, and you attempt to return it to Auto (by
entering 0 and then clicking the Apply button next to the Flow
Control text field), the mode will not switch until after the Auto-
Zero Timer (A-Z 0) duration, under Auto Calibration Timers,
elapses.

5-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Analog Output Calibration

Current Calibration
The current outputs are calibrated at the factory. If a current output
module is replaced or added, calibrate that output. Calibration of a
current output is performed by entering the measured low-scale (zero)
and full-scale (span) signals for each output (see Figure 5-4). These values
are used to offset the output to the correct values.

Figure 5-4.
Output Setup dialog
box, with two streams
(Model 932).

To calibrate the current outputs:

1. Measure the Zero (low-scale) signal of each output:

a. Click the Zero Cal button to change its status to ON. The status of
Normal, Mid-Scale, and Span Cal should be OFF.

b. Connect a current meter to Pins 1 and 2 (at J109 on the Customer


I/O board) and measure the current of Output 1. Under Current
Outputs, enter the value next to Zero (mA), under the first column
(Output 1).

c. Repeat this step for Output 2 (Pins 3 and 4), Output 3 (Pins 5 and
6), and Output 4 (Pins 7 and 8), recording the value for each out-
put in the corresponding field.

d. Click Apply to save the changes.

e. To test the accuracy of the output channels, click Mid-Scale to turn


ON this function. Verify the current outputs are 12 mA, ± 0.03 mA.

f. Click the Zero Cal button to change its status to OFF.

Calibration | 5-5
2. Measure the Span (full-scale) signal of each output:

a. Click the Span Cal button to change its status to ON. The status of
Normal, Mid-Scale, and Zero Cal should be OFF.

b. Connect a current meter to Pins 1 and 2 (at J109 on the Customer


I/O board) and measure the current of Output 1. Under Current
Outputs, enter the value next to Span (mA), under the first col-
umn (Output 1).

c. Repeat this step for Output 2 (Pins 3 and 4), Output 3 (Pins 5 and
6), and Output 4 (Pins 7 and 8), recording the value for each out-
put in the corresponding field.

d. Click Apply to save the changes.

e. To test the accuracy of the output channels, click Mid-Scale to turn


ON this function. Verify the current outputs are 12 mA, ± 0.03 mA.

f. Click the Span Cal button to change its status to OFF.

3. Click the Normal button to change its status to ON, which activates
the outputs. The outputs will now track the concentration readings.

4. Click OK to return to the Setup tab and then click the Save CFG to
EEPROM button to permanently save the changes to the analyzer’s
EEPROM.

5-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Voltage Calibration
The voltage outputs are calibrated at the factory. Most users will prob-
ably use current outputs rather than the non-isolated voltage outputs. If
the Customer I/O board is replaced, then the voltage outputs should be
calibrated if they are used for data acquisition. This is done from the
Output Setup dialog box (Figure 5-4). Calibration of a voltage output is
performed by entering the measured low-scale (zero) and full-scale
(span) signals for each output. These values are used to offset the output
to the correct values.

To calibrate the voltage outputs:

1. Measure the Zero (low-scale) signal of each output:

a. Click the Zero Cal button to change its status to ON. The status of
Normal, Mid-Scale, and Span Cal should be OFF.

b. Connect a voltage meter to Pins 1 and 2 (at J108 on the Customer


I/O board) and measure the voltage of Output 1. Under Voltage
Outputs, enter the value next to Zero (mV), under the first column
(Output 1).

c. Repeat this step for Output 2 (Pins 3 and 4), Output 3 (Pins 5 and
6), and Output 4 (Pins 7 and 8), recording the value for each out-
put in the corresponding field.

d. Click Apply to save the changes.

e. To test the accuracy of the output channels, click Mid-Scale to turn


ON this function. Verify the voltage outputs are 3000 mV, ± 5 mV.

f. Click the Zero Cal button to change its status to OFF.

2. Measure the Span (full-scale) signal of each output:

a. Click the Span Cal button to change its status to ON. The status of
Normal, Mid-Scale, and Zero Cal should be OFF.

b. Connect a voltage meter to Pins 1 and 2 (at J108 on the Customer


I/O board) and measure the voltage of Output 1. Under Voltage
Outputs, enter the value next to Span (mV), under the first col-
umn (Output 1).

Calibration | 5-7
c. Repeat this step for Output 2 (Pins 3 and 4), Output 3 (Pins 5 and
6), and Output 4 (Pins 7 and 8), recording the value for each out-
put in the corresponding field.

d. Click Apply to save the changes.

e. To test the accuracy of the output channels, click Mid-Scale to turn


ON this function. Verify the voltage outputs are 3000 mV, ± 5 mV.

f. Click the Span Cal button to change its status to OFF.

3. Click the Normal button to change its status to ON, which activates
the outputs. The outputs will now track the concentration readings.

4. Click OK to return to the Setup tab and then click the Save CFG to
EEPROM button to permanently save the changes to the analyzer’s
EEPROM.

5-8 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING

The Maintenance & Troubleshooting chapter discusses preventive


maintenance to keep the analyzer system operating at peak efficiency,
how to check for plugging in the analyzer’s sample system, and how to
replace internal parts. This chapter also discusses how to view error
messages that can be used to diagnose and troubleshoot problems with
the analyzer.

Safety Considerations

 Before performing any maintenance, service, or troubleshooting on


the analyzer, review and follow all safety information under
NOTE
“Personnel and Equipment Safety Information” following the Table
of Contents near the beginning of this manual. This information
describes procedures to follow to avoid personal injury and/or
damage to the equipment. All regulatory agency and personnel
safety procedures for your jurisdiction must be followed.

Personnel should be thoroughly familiar with the operation of the


analyzer before performing the maintenance procedures described in
this chapter.

To prevent an explosion, test the area around the analyzer for hazard-
! ous gases and proceed with maintenance only when the area is found
WARNING
to be safe (nonhazardous).

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-1


Maintenance
Generally, the Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers require limited
maintenance. The Preventive Maintenance Schedule lists general mainte-
nance to follow to ensure continued and proper operation of the analyzer.
This section also describes parts that require replacing and the frequency
in which they should be replaced, according to the Preventive Mainte-
nance Schedule.

The electronic circuit boards and other static-sensitive components


! should be stored and transported in static-shielding carriers or
CAUTION
packages.

If the Configurator Software displays Warning or Fault alarm error


! messages that indicate a faulty component requires replacement (as
WARNING described under “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting” later in this
chapter), review this manual for replacement procedures.

For complex maintenance procedures not discussed in this manual,


such as replacing heaters, RTDs, or electronic boards, consult with
your AMETEK distributor or representative. Or, contact the factory
for assistance and information about returning the assembly/analyzer
to the factory for repair.

Preventive Maintenance Schedule


To reduce the occurrence of problems with the analyzer, AMETEK West-
ern Research recommends that you follow the Preventive Maintenance
Schedule. Since most analyzer problems originate within the sample
system, the primary objective of this schedule is proper care of the
sample system.

Preventing leaks in the sample handling system is critical to proper


! analyzer operation. The analyzer’s sample system must be leak
CAUTION checked whenever it has been dismantled for maintenance or repair.

The “Preventive Maintenance Schedule” suggests actions and their fre-


quency when caring for the analyzer. Details and assembly drawings to
assist you when changing out parts can be found in appropriate sections
in this chapter and/or in the “Supplemental Information” tab of this
manual and the Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

6-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Frequency Task
Every 6 Months Zero Gas Cylinder

Check the Zero Gas cylinder and replace it if empty or nearly


empty.

If the Pressure Compensation and/or Reflector Block Purge


options are used, check the Zero Gas cylinder more frequently.
Every 6 Months Sheltered Systems

If your analyzer system is installed in a custom shelter, check the


air filters for the shelter purge and air conditioning systems and
replace them if necessary.

Depending on the location of the site and its environmental


conditions, it may be necessary to check and replace these filters
more frequently.
9–12 Months Source Lamps

Replace the source lamps. The source lamps may need to be


replaced sooner if information from the analyzer’s diagnostics
indicates related alarms (i.e., “w: ALC out of range”, “w: PMT
signal out of range”, or “w: Excessive zero drift” errors). For
more information, refer to “Replacing the Source Lamps” in this
chapter.
Every Year Measuring Cell

Clean the Measuring Cell and the rest of the analyzer’s sample
system. This schedule is a minimum requirement. If other
conditions are found to be present, as outlined under the section
titled “Disassembling and Cleaning the Measuring Cell,” cleaning
may be required more frequently.

At the same time, replace the o-rings.


Every Year Heated Acid Gas Probe (Optional)

Replace the o-rings and filters.

For more information, refer to the Installation & Maintenance


Guide for the Heated Acid Gas Probe used with your analyzer
(shipped with the analyzer if this option is used).

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-3


Before Performing Maintenance

Under normal operating conditions, lethal concentrations of toxic


! gases from the process may be present within the analyzer’s sample
WARNING
system.

Before working on the sample system, manually Zero the analyzer


(force its Flow Control Mode to “zero” from the Gas Calibration
dialog box, by entering “2” in the Flow Control text field), isolate it
(block it in) from the process, and disconnect the power. Follow this
procedure prior to changing out any analyzer components or replac-
ing any replaceable parts (as part of regular preventive maintenance),
or performing leaks checks following the replacement of instrument
air or other adjustments to any of the connections points in the
analyzer’s sample system. If this is not possible, a breathing
apparatus must be worn while servicing the sample system.

The sample system is defined as all components in the analyzer


system through which sample gas passes.

Detecting Plugs in the Sample System

If analyzer problems occur, they are most likely related to improper


sample system operation, such as plugs or leaks. Plugs in the sample
system cause problems in analyzer response time, either to changing
process conditions or to Zero Gas. Leaks are potentially dangerous and
will eventually lead to corrosion problems.

Detecting plugs in the sample system is best done by observing the


analyzer’s measurement response time immediately following a Zero
function. A typical response is in the range of 15–30 seconds. Observe
your analyzer and learn what a normal response time is. Use the recorded
response time as a reference for detecting the formation of plugs in the
sample system.

If the sample response time is longer than normal, it is most likely due to
plugging somewhere in the sample system. The next step is to locate and
remove the plug. The portion of the sample system with the highest risk
of plugging is the sample inlet and the section of the sample inlet most
prone to plugging is the Sample Probe Valve. One way to confirm that a
plug is in the sample inlet is to cap the Vent Line (or close the Vent
Valve’s isolation valve if available) and Zero the analyzer.

6-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


If the Pressure Compensation option is installed, observe the Cell
Pres(sure) reading on the Cell/Miscellaneous (compensation) parameters
dialog box, and if the reading approaches the Zero Gas supply pressure, a
plug is present somewhere in the sample inlet.

To avoid damaging the pressure transducer, do not set the pressure


! higher than the pressure transducer rating, either 210 KPAA (30
CAUTION
PSIA) or 0–700 KPAA (0–100 PSIA).

After confirming that the plug is somewhere in the sample inlet, take
 all appropriate safety precautions and dismantle the sample system,
NOTE starting at the Sample Probe.

Plugs in the sample outlet (or vent side) of the sample system are rare. If
an aspirator is used to transport the sample gas (i.e., part of the Heated
Acid Gas Probe, if used), a plug in the vent system can cause the aspira-
tor drive air to flow back into the Measuring Cell and, essentially, simulate
a Zero Gas Flow or Backpurge condition.

To check the analyzer’s sample system for possible plugging:

1. While working from the Configurator Software, manually Zero the


analyzer.

To do this, click Gas Calibration from the Setup tab to view the Gas
Calibration dialog box. Enter “2” (zero) in the Flow Control text field.
Click Apply (next to Flow Control) to set the analyzer into zero Flow
Control mode and then click OK. Do not save this parameter change
to EEPROM (it is a temporary change only).

2. The Zero Gas rotameter should be active with flow indication.

3. Close the isolation valve on the Sample Line or Sample Probe (if
used). Observe the flow on the rotameter. If the flow reduces to a
stop, a large plug has occurred somewhere in the sample system.

Open the isolation valve on the Sample Line or Sample Probe (if
used).

4. Close the isolation valve on the Vent Line or Sample Probe (if used),
or temporarily install a cap.

Observe the flow on the Zero Gas rotameter. If the flow reduces to a
stop, a large plug has occurred somewhere in the sample system.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-5


5. After locating the cause of the restriction or plug (and after cleaning
or replacing the part or line), leak test the fittings or connections that
were loosened or replaced. To do this, follow the procedures under
“Sample System Leak Check” in Chapter 3.

6. Return the isolation valve on the Vent Line or Sample Probe (if
available) to the open position (or remove the cap and reconnect the
Vent Pipe to the Vent port on the Measuring Cell). Both isolation
valves should be open.

7. While working from the Configurator Software, return the analyzer


Flow Control setting to Analyzer Control Mode.

To do this, click the Gas Calibration button from the Setup tab to
view the Gas Calibration dialog box. Enter “0” (auto) in the Flow
Control text field. Click Apply (next to Flow Control) to set the
analyzer into auto Flow Control mode and then click OK.

8. Check and record the sample response time to use later as a refer-
ence while testing response time.

Preventing Plugs in the Sample System

Plugs in the sample system are less common in low dewpoint tempera-
ture applications. If a plug occurs on a system with an automatic shut-off
valve installed in the sample system, the plug may be caused by a faulty
valve operation.

However, in high dewpoint applications, plugs may occur more fre-


quently due to severe temperature fluctuations along the sample path or,
occasionally, faulty heaters in the sample system.

Preventing plugs is done by maintaining the necessary operating tem-


peratures for each temperature-controlled zone. Check the real time
temperature for each Temperature Zone (on the Analyzer Data tab) and
compare it to its Setpoint temperature (on the Temperature Control
dialog box).

6-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Changing Out Replaceable Parts
The following sections discuss the parts that should be changed out,
according to the “Preventive Maintenance Schedule.” These descriptions
focus mainly on the AMETEK sample system.

Preventing leaks in the sample handling system is critical to proper


! analyzer operation. If sample gas migrates into the Reflector Block or
CAUTION
Optical Bench Assembly (uncommon) due to a leak in the Measuring
Cell Assembly, the optics will become damaged and most likely require
replacement. Most leaks are preventable with regular cleaning and
replacement of the Measuring Cell o-rings.

Measuring Cell Preventive Maintenance

The preventive maintenance procedure discussed in this section is for a


Standard Range (40 cm) unheated Measuring Cell (Figure 6-2). For other
types of Measuring Cells, refer to the “Supplemental Information” tab of
this manual, or the Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

Disassembling and Cleaning the Measuring Cell

The o-rings in the Measuring Cell should be replaced every year to avoid
a leak in the sample system. While the Measuring Cell is disassembled,
clean its chambers and parts, including the windows, and replace the
o-rings.

Refer to Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2 (or the Measuring Cell drawing in the
“Supplemental Information” tab of this manual) for assistance in locating
and identifying the parts that make up the Measuring Cell and its connec-
tion point on the Optical bench.

 Figure 6-1 illustrates a Model 932 Optical Bench Assembly. However,


this maintenance procedure is the same for Model 931 analyzers.
NOTE

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-7


Clean the Measuring Cell and its windows:

• If the analyzer responds slowly to zero gas when the sample system
is free of restrictions, or

• If evidence of contamination is present in the sampling tubing, or

• Every year as indicated in the “Preventive Maintenance Schedule.”

Replace the o-rings in the Measuring Cell:

• If the o-rings are found to be damaged while performing an un-


scheduled cleaning.

• Every year as indicated in the “Preventive Maintenance Schedule.”

If at any time during maintenance the Measuring Cell Windows


! are found to be scratched, cracked, or chipped, or the o-rings are
CAUTION
damaged, replace the parts immediately. Do not operate the ana-
lyzer with faulty parts.

LOOSE CLAMPED

OPTICAL BENCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Figure 6-1.
Upper Enclosure layout,
Cell Window Housing.

6-8 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


To disassemble and clean the Measuring Cell:

Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
! gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.
WARNING
Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-
tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power up
the laptop computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

1. Connect a laptop computer to the analyzer via the Explosion-Proof


Digital Communications Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure.

Start the Configurator Software and establish communication with


the analyzer. Refer to “Establishing Communication Between the
Analyzer and Computer,” in Chapter 3.

From the Setup tab click Gas Calibration to view the Gas Calibra-
tion dialog box and enter “2” (zero) in the Flow Control text field.
Click the Apply button (next to Flow Control) to set the analyzer
into the zero Flow Control mode and then click OK. Do not save this
parameter change to EEPROM (it is a temporary change only).

2. If the analyzer is using measured Pressure Compensation (optional),


put pressure compensation into fixed mode so that a “f: Sample gas
pressure too low” error does not occur.

To do this, view the Cell/Misc (Compensation) Parameters dialog


box. In the Default Cell Pres (pressure compensation) field, enter a
value that is the same as, or approximately, the cell pressure. Refer to
“Cell/Miscellaneous (Compensation) Parameters” in Chapter 4 for
more information.

Close the isolation valve on the Sample Line or Sample Probe (if
used). Allow the analyzer sample system to Zero for 2–3 minutes.

3. Return to the Gas Calibration dialog box and enter “1” (shut-in/off)
in the Flow Control text field. Click Apply (next to Flow Control)
and then click OK.

Allow the sample system pressure to bleed down to atmospheric


pressure (check the pressure gauge). If there is an isolation valve on
the Vent Line, close it (or cap the Vent Line outlet).

If the sample system does not have an isolation valve, Zero gas
 may continue to flow. Shut off the Zero gas.
NOTE

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-9


4. Disconnect AC power to the analyzer by opening the power-discon-
nect switch (external to the analyzer). Power down the computer,
too, while maintenance is being performed.

5. Disconnect the tubing from the Measuring Cell.

6. Remove the three M4 x 35 mm screws that secure the Measuring Cell


to the Cell Window Housing (see Figure 6-1). Grasp the edge of the
Window and carefully remove it. Remove the o-ring.

7. Hold the Measuring Cell vertically so that the Reflector Block is on


top and remove the three screws that secure the Reflector Block to
the Measuring Cell. Remove the Reflector Block.

Grasp the edge of the Window and carefully remove it. Remove the
two o-rings.

8. Using Kimwipes® EX-L or an equivalent extra low-lint tissue, clean


the front and back side of the windows. A high purity solvent, such
as isopropanol, can also be used. Rinse with pharmaceutical-grade
distilled water. Replace chipped or cracked windows.

9. Inspect the interior of the Measuring Cell for foreign material. If you
need to clean the interior, use a nonabrasive detergent and water
solution, isopropanol, or reagent-grade acetone followed by a rinse
with pharmaceutical-grade distilled water.

10. Allow all components to dry thoroughly before reassembling.

6-10 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Replacing Parts and Reassembling the Measuring Cell

It is critical to reassemble the Reflector Block in the exact orienta-


! tion as it was assembled at the factory.
CAUTION

To replace the o-rings and reassemble the Measuring Cell:

1. Hold the Measuring Cell vertically with the Reflector Block end up
and install two new o-rings and the Window.

2. Place the Reflector Block on the Measuring Cell, with the “peak-line”
of the Reflector Block at 90 degrees to a line through the fittings.
Ensure that the Measuring Cell Window does not slide out of posi-
tion when the Measuring Cell is initially placed against the Reflector
Block.

Using the three screws removed earlier, secure the Reflector Block to
the Measuring Cell. Tighten the screws evenly.

3. Invert the Measuring Cell and install a new o-ring and the window.

4. Align the two larger-diameter holes in the Cell Window Housing


with the two larger-diameter holes in the Measuring Cell. Using the
three screws removed earlier, secure the Measuring Cell to the Cell
Window Housing on the Optical Bench. Tighten the screws evenly.

5. Reconnect the tubing to the Measuring Cell.

Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
! gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.
WARNING
Do not power up the analyzer or computer if there is a hazardous
gas atmosphere present.

6. Restore power to the analyzer. Power up the computer, if it was


powered down while maintenance was being performed.

7. Perform a leak (pressure) check on the sample system fittings that


were disconnected/reconnected. These procedures are described in
Chapter 3 under the section titled “Sample System Leak Check.”

8. Open the valves isolating the sample system from the process stream
and/or remove the cap from the Vent Line outlet.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-11


9. Allow the analyzer to warm up then click Gas Calibration from the
Setup tab. Enter “2” (zero) in the Flow Control text field. Click
Apply (next to Flow Control) to set the analyzer into the zero Flow
Control mode and then click OK. Do not save this parameter change
to EEPROM (it is a temporary change only).

10. Click Optical Bench from the Setup tab and perform an Auto-Setup
function by clicking Auto-Setup.

11. When the Auto-Setup is complete, return to the Gas Calibration


dialog box and perform a manual zero calibration by clicking the
ManZero button.

12. When the zero calibration is complete, return the Flow Control
setting in the Gas Calibration dialog box to “auto” by entering “0” in
the Flow Control text field. Click OK, and then click Apply (next to
Flow Control) to set the analyzer into auto Flow Control mode and
then click OK. Save this parameter change to EEPROM by clicking
the Save CFG to EEPROM button on the Setup tab.

6-12 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Figure 6-2.
40 cm Measuring Cell.

 Figure 6-2 illustrates a 40 cm Measuring Cell. Assembly drawings


and maintenance procedures for other types of Measuring Cells can
NOTE
be found in Manual Supplements in the “Supplemental Informa-
tion” tab of this manual or the Documentation Package shipped
with the analyzer. The supplements also list part numbers for the
replaceable parts (o-rings and Cell Window).

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-13


Source Lamp Replacement

The typical life span of the source lamps is approximately 9–12 months of
continuous operation. However, a source lamp can exhibit signs of degra-
dation after 5–6 months.

When Do the Source Lamps Need to be Replaced?

Possible signs of degradation or indications of Source Lamp failures are:


• Unstable lamp voltage (check voltage levels on the Optical Bench
Data tab – see Figure 6-3), or
• Unstable analyzer output under Zero Gas conditions (“w: Excessive
zero drift” warning error is displayed in the HC Scode alarm list on
the Status tab of the Configurator Software – see Figure 6-4), or
• The “w: ALC out of range” (automatic lamp control PMT signals)
warning error is displayed in the MC Scode alarm list on the Status
tab of the Configurator Software – see Figure 6-4.

If your application requires two different types of source lamps, do


! not interchange the source lamps.
CAUTION

Figure 6-3.
Optical Bench Data
tab (Model 932).

Figure 6-4.
HC Scode and
MC Scode alarm lists
on Status tab
(Model 932).

6-14 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


About the Source Lamps

• Source Lamp 1 is closest to the Measuring Cell.

• The cathode of the source lamp must be centered on the optical axis
of the beam splitter for optimal operation of the analyzer. The cath-
ode and the outer envelope of the lamp are not necessarily concen-
tric or consistent from lamp to lamp.

Replacing the Source Lamps

Refer to Figure 6-5 for assistance in locating and identifying the hard-
ware components encountered while replacing the source lamps.

When handling the source lamps, it is very important to avoid


! touching the lamp windows because residual oils from the fingers will
CAUTION
absorb ultraviolet light. The window is the flat surface at the end of
the narrow glass tube. The lamp assembly is fragile and should be
handled with care.

To replace Source Lamps:

Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
! gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.
WARNING

1. Disconnect power from the analyzer by opening the power-discon-


nect switch (external to the analyzer).

2. After the area has been tested for hazardous gases (and found to be
safe), remove the 24 M10 screws from the EEx d Upper Enclosure
door and open it.

3. Loosen – but do not remove – the two M3 x 8 screws on the Optical


Bench Microcontroller mounting bracket.

Swing the Microcontroller/Micro-Interface board assembly outward.

4. Loosen the Lamp Retaining Screw on the bottom of the lamp socket
and rotate the Lamp Adjustment Plate 90 degrees. Remove the Lamp
Socket Assembly.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-15


Figure 6-5.
Model 932 Optical
Bench Assembly.

 Figure 6-5 illustrates an Optical Bench Assembly from a Model 932


Analyzer. However, the lamp replacement procedure is the same for a
NOTE
Model 931 Analyzer.

6-16 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


5. Loosen the Lamp Clamping Screw on the Lamp Compression Bar
and remove each lamp by rotating and sliding it downward.

Do not rotate or pull on the base of the source lamp because this
! may cause it to separate from the glass envelope. Grasp the glass
CAUTION
envelope when rotating or pulling the source lamp.

6. Install the new lamps. Make sure that the narrow end of each lamp is
pushed completely into the holder. Do not touch the (flat) window at
the end of the lamp.

7. Lightly tighten each Lamp Clamping Screw to secure each lamp. Do


not overtighten; the spring should not be collapsed.

8. Reinstall each Lamp Socket Assembly by rotating the Lamp Adjust-


ment Plate 90 degrees (to its original position) and tighten the Lamp
Retaining Screw to secure the Lamp Socket Assemblies. Do not
overtighten; the spring should not be collapsed. The lamp must be
allowed to move so it can be adjusted later in this procedure.

It is necessary to work with the EEx d Upper Enclosure door open


! after replacing source lamps so that adjustments can be made to the
WARNING
lamps.

Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

9. After the area has been tested for hazardous gases (and found to be
safe), restore power to the analyzer. Allow the analyzer to warm up
before continuing.

Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communi-


! cations Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power
WARNING
up the laptop computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere
present.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-17


10. Power up the laptop computer and connect the serial cable to the
Digital Communications Port on the Lower Enclosure.

Start the Configurator Software and establish communications with


the analyzer.

a. From the Status tab, click the Conc. Alarm Soft Enable On/Off
button to temporarily disable the Concentration Alarms.

Allow the analyzer to stabilize for approximately 10 minutes


before continuing.

b. From the Gas Calibration dialog box (Figure 6-6), enter “2” (zero)
in the Flow Control text field. Click Apply (next to Flow Con-
trol) to set the analyzer into zero Flow Control mode and then
click OK. Do not save this parameter change to EEPROM (it is a
temporary change only). Allow the zero gas to flow for 2–3
minutes.

c. Perform an Auto-Setup (see “The Auto-Setup Sequence” later in


this chapter) and then return to this procedure.

Figure 6-6.
Gas Calibration dialog
box (Model 932).

6-18 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


11. From the Optical Bench dialog box (Figure 6-7), click the ALC On
check box to turn off the Automatic Lamp Control function
(off = unchecked). The ALC On function must be off to ensure the
analyzer is not making automatic adjustments while you are setting
the Measure and Reference signals to operate at optimum ratios to
each other, as described in the following steps.

Click OK. Do not save this parameter change to EEPROM (it is a


temporary change only).

Figure 6-7.
Optical Bench dialog
box (Model 932).

12. Click the Open Configuration icon on the Standard Toolbar and
double-click the “LampSetup.dyc” file to open it.

If the message “The device doesn’t exist. Disabling display.” appears,


click OK. If similar messages appear, continue clicking OK until the
Trend graph appears (Figure 6-8, for Model 931 Analyzers; Figure
6-10, for Model 932 Analyzers).

Figure 6-8.
Trend graph
(LampSetup.dyc file),
Model 931 Analyzers.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-19


Model 931 Analyzers:
The Measure and Reference PMT signals will be displayed on one
Trend graph (Figure 6-8).

a. Right-click on the Trend graph window and then click Scan from
the context menu to view the Trend Properties dialog box (Figure
6-9).

Figure 6-9.
Trend Properties dialog
box (as shown for Model
931 Analyzers).

b. To assign an input to a channel click the first (top) button under


Channels to select it.

c. Next, click Device under Data Source to enable the Input Chan-
nel list box. From this list, select “PMT Ref1” to assign this signal
to the first channel.

d. Repeat Step b and Step c to assign “PMT Ref 2”, “PMT Msr1”, and
“PMT Msr2” from the Input Channel list to subsequent Channels.

e. Click OK when finished.

Figure 6-10.
Trend graphs – Measure
and Reference PMT
(LampSetup.dyc file),
Model 932 Analyzers.

6-20 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Model 932 Analyzers:
The Measure and Reference PMT signals will be displayed on two
Trend graphs, one called Measure PMT and one called Reference
PMT (Figure 6-10).

a. Right-click on the Measure PMT Trend graph window and then


click Scan from the context menu to view the Trend Properties
dialog box (Figure 6-9).

b. To assign an input to a channel click the first (top) button under


Channels to select it.

c. Next, click Device under Data Source to enable the Input Chan-
nel list box. From this list, select “PMT Ref1” to assign this signal
to the first channel.

d. Repeat Step b and Step c to assign “PMT Msr2”, “PMT Msr 3”,
“PMT Msr4”, “PMT Msr5”, and “PMT Msr6” from the Input
Channel list to subsequent Channels.

e. Click OK when finished.

f. Right-click on the Reference PMT Trend graph window and then


click Scan from the context menu to view the Trend Properties
dialog box.

g. To assign an input to a channel click the first (top) button under


Channels to select it.

h. Next, click Device under Data Source to enable the Input Chan-
nel list box. From this list, select “PMT Msr1” to assign this signal
to the first channel.

i. Repeat Step g and Step h to assign “PMT Ref 2”, “PMT Ref 3”,
“PMT Ref 4”, “PMT Ref 5”, and “PMT Ref 6” from the Input
Channel list to subsequent Channels.

j. Click OK when finished.

For more information about setting up Scan properties, refer to


 “Scanning Data” in Chapter 4.
NOTE

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-21


13. Click on the Standard Toolbar to begin scanning the Measure
and Reference PMT signals.

Model 931 Analyzers:


• Observe the PMT signal of filter 1 if Lamp 1 was replaced.
• Observe the PMT signal of filter 2 if Lamp 2 was replaced.

Model 932 Analyzers:


(This filter assignment is the factory default for Model 932 Multi-Gas
Analyzers. See “Optical Bench” in Chapter 4 for other options.)
• Observe the PMT signals of filter positions 1, 3, and 5 if Lamp 1
was replaced.
• Observe the PMT signals of filter positions 2, 4, and 6 if Lamp 2
was replaced.

 To change the Y-axis voltage scale, move the mouse pointer to the
graph and right-click. Click Display and change the Upper limit and
NOTE
Lower limit.

Model 932 Analyzers only:


If the lamp pulse current-control value for a filter location is negative,
that filter location is not used.

14. Align the Source Lamps (described under “Source Lamp Alignment,”
later in this chapter) to ensure optimal operation and then perform
another Auto-Setup. Return to these procedures after the Auto-
Setup is complete.

15. Return to the Status tab and click the Conc. Alarm Soft Enable On/
Off button to enable the Concentration Alarms and then click OK.

Return to the Gas Calibration dialog box and change the Flow
Control setting back to “auto” by entering “0” in the Flow Control
text field. Click the Apply button (next to Flow Control) to set the
analyzer into auto Flow Control mode and then click OK.

6-22 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


16. After the lamp replacement and alignment process is complete, the
analyzer is ready to operate.

If you have additional work to do from the Configurator Software,


complete your work and then disconnect the computer from the
analyzer. Do this by exiting the Configurator Software, powering
down the laptop computer, and disconnecting the serial communica-
tion cable from the Digital Communications Port on the Lower
Enclosure.

Close the cover of the Digital Communications Port and tighten the
hex screw to secure it in place.

17. Using a soft, nonabrasive cloth, gently clean the mating areas
(flamepath) of the Upper Enclosure and its door and replace the 24
M10 screws. Tighten the M10 screws to 9.0 Nm, ±1.0 Nm (80 in.-lb,
±9 in.-lb).

Auto-Setup

The Auto-Setup function optimizes PMT (photomultiplier tube) gain and


the source lamp current after the source lamps have been replaced or
adjusted. Always initiate an Auto-Setup after any lamps, optical filters, or
PMTs have been installed or replaced.

When the Auto-Setup is initialized, the Automatic Lamp Control (ALC


On) function is automatically turned on (checked), as seen on the Optical
Bench dialog box.

When is an Auto-Setup Required?

Auto-Setup is required when:


• The “w: PMT signal out of range” error is displayed in the MC
Scode alarm list on the Status tab.
• One or both source lamps are replaced.
• Any optical filter is replaced.
• One or both PMTs are replaced.
• The Optical Bench Service Electronics board is replaced.
• The Measuring Cell windows and/or optics are cleaned.

When is an Auto-Setup Not Required?

Auto-Setup is not required as part of a preventive maintenance schedule


(i.e., do not perform an Auto-Setup every month).

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-23


PMT Level and PMT Balance

PMT Level and PMT Balance are adjusted only during the Auto-Setup
sequence. The range of operation for both these parameters is 0–10000 mV.
After a successful Auto-Setup, the PMT Level should be between
4500 mV and 7500 mV, while the PMT Balance should be between
1000 mV and 9000 mV. The analyzer will function with values outside
these ranges, but it is a sign that a change has likely occurred in the
transmission of light within the Optical Bench.

At the end of every Auto-Setup, always check the PMT Level and PMT
Balance. Take note of severe changes in PMT Level and PMT Balance
because they are as important as the absolute value.

The PMT Level signal adjusts the gain of both PMTs simultaneously in
the same direction. PMT Balance adjusts the gain of the two PMTs in
opposite directions by controlling a virtual ground circuit on the Optical
Bench Service Electronics board.

If the PMT signals are outside their normal range of operation after the
Auto-Setup function is complete, check for the following:

• Was the Auto-Setup done with zero gas flowing through the sample
system?

• Are the Measuring Cell windows clean?

• Are the PMTs in their original sockets (i.e., is the higher gain PMT in
the Measure path)?

• Do the source lamps need replacement? If not, are the source lamps
aligned?

• Have there been any leaks from the Measuring Cell? If so, check the
condition of the mirrors, windows, and o-rings in the Measuring Cell
(including Reflector Block). Contact AMETEK for procedures not
discussed in this manual.

6-24 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Auto-Setup Fault Message and Corrective Action

If during the Auto-Setup the warning error message “w: Bench auto-
setup problem” is displayed (check the MC Scode alarm list on the Status
tab), it may indicate a problem with the PMT Level or PMT Balance signal.
Refer to “Microcontroller Board Error Conditions and Corrective Action”
later in this chapter for corrective action to take to reset this alarm. Restart
the Auto-Setup function after this alarm has been corrected.

The Auto-Setup Sequence

To perform an Auto-Setup:

1. From the Gas Calibration dialog box, enter “2” (zero) in the Flow
Control text field. Click Apply (next to Flow Control) to set the
analyzer into zero Flow Control mode and then click OK. Do not
save this parameter change to EEPROM (it is a temporary change
only). Allow the zero gas to flow for 2–3 minutes.

2. From the Status tab, click the Conc. Alarm Soft Enable On/Off
button to temporarily disable the Concentration Alarms and then
click OK.

Allow the analyzer to stabilize for approximately 10 minutes before


continuing.

3. From the Optical Bench dialog box, check and record the PMT Level
and PMT Balance values.

4. Click the Auto-Setup button to initiate the process, which takes


about 3 minutes to complete.

Observe the top line of the Display readout. The following messages
are displayed to indicate which step of the Auto-Setup process is
being performed:

• Adjusting PMT Level


• Adjusting Lamp Pulses
• Adjusting PMT Balance
• Adjusting PMT Level
• Adjusting Lamp Pulses
• Setting Up ALC
• Off/Completed

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-25


5. When the message “Off/Completed” is displayed, the Auto-Setup
function is complete.

P300 may have up to four jumpers installed (when changing


 jumpers, at least one must be present at all times).
NOTE
P301 may have up to two jumpers installed (when changing
jumpers, at least one must be present at all times). However, P301
must have only one jumper during normal operation.

6. From the Optical Bench dialog box, check the PMT Level and PMT
Balance values again. The PMT Level should be between
4500 mV and 7500 mV, while the PMT Balance should be between
1000 mV and 9000 mV.

Cancel Auto-Setup

To cancel the Auto-Setup function, click the Cancel Auto-Setup button


on the Optical Bench dialog box.

6-26 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Manipulating the PMT Level and PMT Balance

If a PMT is replaced, it may be necessary to change the P300 and P301


jumper settings on the Optical Bench Service Electronics board.
Changing the jumper positions provides coarse gain adjustment of the
Reference PMT and therefore changes the PMT Level and PMT Balance.

There are six jumper positions (four in P300 and two in P301) that can
accommodate one jumper each. At least one jumper is required in P300
and P301 at all times. Adding jumpers increases the supply voltage avail-
able to the Reference path PMT. This increases the PMT Balance and, to a
small degree, decreases the PMT Level. The opposite occurs if jumpers
are removed.

Figure 6-11 describes the effect on the PMT Balance in relation to different
jumper positions.

To achieve an acceptable PMT Balance and PMT Level:

1. If jumpers have been reconfigured, perform an Auto-Setup.

2. After an acceptable PMT Balance and PMT Level has been achieved,
initiate a manual zero.

To do this, click Gas Calibration from the Setup tab to view the Gas
Calibration dialog box and enter “2” (zero) in the Flow Control text
field.

Click the ManZero button to initiate a manual zero calibration and


then click OK. To check the time remaining for the zero function,
observe the Time to end of cal(sec) timer under Countdown timers
on the Analyzer Data tab. You can also verify that the zero calibra-
tion is in progress by viewing the Calibration/Solenoid Status field
in the upper-right corner of the Status tab. It should display
“Manual-zero”.

Allow the zero gas to flow for 5 minutes.

3. Return to the Gas Calibration dialog box and change the Flow
Control setting back to “auto” by entering “0” in the Flow Control
text field (to return the analyzer to Analyzer Control Mode). Click
Apply (next to Flow Control) to set the analyzer into auto Flow
Control mode and then click OK. Click the Save CFG to EEPROM
button on the Setup tab to save this parameter change to EEPROM.

4. From the Status tab, click the Conc. Alarm Soft Enable On/Off
button to enable the Concentration Alarms and then click OK.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-27


Jumper Positions
P300 P301
1 2 3 4 5 6
X X X X X
Higher PMT
Balance X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X
X X X X
X X
X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
Figure 6-11. X X
Optical Bench Service
Electronics board P300 X X
Lower PMT
jumper position vs PMT Balance
X X
balance. X X

When changing jumpers, at least one must be present in P300 and


 P301 at all times.
NOTE

6-28 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Source Lamp Alignment

If the Measure or Reference PMT voltage reaches 10000 mV at any time


during the alignment manipulations (while rotating a lamp), decrease the
PMT Level, allow the analyzer to stabilize for approximately 10 minutes,
and perform an Auto-Setup before continuing.

To align the source lamps:

1. If not already done, loosen – but do not remove – the two M3 x 8


screws on the Optical Bench Microcontroller mounting bracket and
swing the Microcontroller/Micro-Interface board assembly outward.

Slightly loosen the Lamp Clamping and Lamp Retaining screws.

2. While viewing the signals on the LampSetup screen in the


Configurator Software (see Figure 6-8 for Model 931; Figure 6-9 for
Model 932), slowly rotate the new lamp to obtain the maximum voltage
signal from the Measure PMT. Since the software is updated at one-
second intervals use slow, small movements, pausing each turn to view
the new value. See “Scheduling Scans” in Chapter 4 for more infor-
mation about scan intervals.

 Because the Automatic Lamp Control (ALC On function) is turned


off, the displayed signal may not be completely steady.
NOTE

3. Loosen the Locking Screw located between the two source lamps.

4. To obtain the maximum signal from the Measure PMT voltage, adjust
the Lamp Adjusting Screw for the lamp that is being adjusted.

5. If the other lamp was also replaced, repeat Steps 2–4.

6. Tighten the Locking Screw located between the two source lamps.

7. Tighten the Lamp Clamping Screw to secure the lamps. Do not


overtighten; the spring should not be collapsed.

8. Tighten the Lamp Retaining Screw to secure the lamp socket. Do not
overtighten; the spring should not be collapsed.

9. Swing the Microcontroller/Micro-Interface board assembly back into


its original position.

Tighten the two M3 X 8 screws on the Optical Bench Microcontroller


mounting bracket.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-29


10. Allow the analyzer to operate for 15 minutes and then initiate an
Auto-Setup function, which automatically turns on the ALC On
(Enable) function. Continue with these procedures only after the
Auto-Setup is complete.

For detailed information about performing an Auto-Setup, refer to


“The Auto-Setup Sequence,” earlier in this chapter.

Wait 2–3 minutes before continuing.

11. After the Auto-Setup is complete, initiate a manual zero.

To do this, click Gas Calibration from the Setup tab to view the Gas
Calibration dialog box and enter “2” (zero) in the Flow Control text
field.

Click the ManZero button to initiate the manual zero calibration and
then click OK.

To check the time remaining for the zero function, observe the Time
to end of cal(sec) timer under Countdown timers on the Analyzer
Data tab. You can also verify that the zero calibration is in progress
by viewing the Calibration/Solenoid Status field in the upper-right
corner of the Status tab. It should display “Manual-zero”.

Allow the zero gas to flow for 5 minutes.

12. When the zero calibration is complete return to the Status tab, click
the Conc. Alarm Soft Enable On/Off button to enable the Concentra-
tion Alarms, and then click OK.

Return to the Gas Calibration dialog box and change the Flow
Control setting back to “auto” by entering “0” in the Flow Control
text field (to return the analyzer to Analyzer Control Mode). Click
Apply (next to Flow Control) to set the analyzer into auto Flow
Control mode and then click OK. Click the Save CFG to EEPROM
button on the Setup tab to save this parameter change to EEPROM.

The lamp replacement and alignment process is complete and the ana-
lyzer is ready to operate.

6-30 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


EEPROM Replacement

The EEPROM must be replaced when the Host Controller “w: EEPROM
full” warning alarm error is displayed by the Configurator Software in the
HC Scode alarm list on the Status tab (see Figure 6-13).

This warning condition indicates the number of times that configuration


data has been rewritten to the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory) has ex-
ceeded the safe number (95 % of the acceptable 20K writes is used). This
alarm will remain active (set) until the EEPROM is replaced.

Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
! gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.
WARNING
Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-
tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power up
the computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

To replace the EEPROM:


1. Connect a laptop computer to the analyzer, power up the computer,
and establish communication with the analyzer, as discussed in
Chapter 3.

2. From the General tab, click Save Configuration to save the current
analyzer configuration parameter values to a file on the computer.

Record the location and name of this file; it will be necessary to use
this file to restore the analyzer configuration parameter values after
replacing the EEPROM.

Refer to “Saving Analyzer Configuration Parameters” in Chapter 4


for more information.

3. Backpurge the analyzer to remove any residual contaminants in the


sample system.

4. Exit the Configurator Software. Power down the analyzer and the
computer. Remove the 24 M10 screws from the Lower Enclosure
door and open it.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-31


5. While wearing a static wrist strap, use an IC extraction tool to re-
move the EEPROM (U106) from the Host Controller board (see
Figure 6-12). If an extraction tool is not available, use a small flathead
screwdriver but be careful not to bend any pins while removing it.

If it becomes necessary to handle any of the electronic circuit boards,


! do not subject the boards to static discharge. The ideal solution is a
WARNING static-safe work area. Since such areas typically are not available at
analyzer installation sites, the use of a wrist strap connected directly
to a ground is recommended. If a wrist strap is not available, you
should at the very least touch the metal chassis (to ground yourself)
before handling or touching the EEPROM or Host Controller board.

6. Properly orient the new EEPROM by aligning the notch on it with


the notch on the board’s silk-screen and place it on the IC socket.
Make sure all of the pins are seated in their pin sockets before push-
ing the EEPROM gently and completely into the socket.

7. Using a soft nonabrasive cloth, gently clean the mating areas


(flamepath) of the Lower Enclosure and its door.

Close the Lower Enclosure door and replace the 24 M10 screws.
Tighten the M10 screws to 9.0 Nm, ±1.0 Nm (80 in.-lb, ±9 in.-lb).

Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
! gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.
WARNING
Do not power up the analyzer or laptop computer if there is a hazard-
ous gas atmosphere present.

8. Power up the analyzer and the computer, start the Configurator


Software, and establish communication with the analyzer. To do this,
click Setup from the General tab to view the Communication Set-
tings dialog box. In the Slave ID field enter “1” (if using Modbus
Serial communication) or “255” (if using Modbus TCP communica-
tion) and click OK.

9. From the General tab, click Restore Configuration. Locate and open
the file saved earlier. Refer to “Restoring Analyzer Configuration
Parameters” in Chapter 4 for more information, and for information
about checking and re-entering the analyzer serial number (if neces-
sary).

6-32 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Figure 6-12.
Host Controller board
(P/N 100-1757, Rev. B).

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-33


Examining and Caring For the Flamepaths

The Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers are designed with
flamepaths that will prevent flame propagation from within the
analyzer’s EEx d Electronics Enclosures to the outside, should an internal
explosion occur.

The flamepaths on the Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers consist of:

• The EEx d Upper and Lower Enclosure joining surfaces (enclosure


doors and housings), cable entry ports, and the Digital Communica-
tions Port.

• Enclosure (Electrical) Connection Seal, Cell Window Housing, and


Solenoid Junction Box (North American).

Upper/Lower Electronics Enclosure Flamepaths (Joining Surfaces)

Any time either EEx d (Upper or Lower) Electronics Enclosure is opened


for maintenance, inspect the flamepath for scratches, indentations, or
other damage. Carefully clean the flamepaths (joining surfaces) with a
soft nonabrasive cloth just prior to closing it.

If it is necessary to use a cleaning agent, make sure the AC power


! to the analyzer is off. Also, the agent must be nonabrasive and
CAUTION
must not attack aluminum (example, a suitable agent is Isopro-
panol). Following any maintenance and/or cleaning – and after the
cleaning fluid has evaporated completely – immediately close the
EEx d Upper/Lower Enclosure.

When performing equipment maintenance in hazardous locations,


! all safety standards and procedures must be followed, as specified
WARNING by the Owner Company, local electrical-inspection authority, and
National/EU regulations.

6-34 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


When the EEx d Upper/Lower Enclosure is opened for maintenance or
! repair, take extreme care to avoid scratching or damaging its
WARNING
flamepaths.

If at any time the enclosure door is open and service personnel are not
working on the EEx d Upper/Lower Enclosure, close the door and
secure it with at least one screw. This will reduce the risk of inadvert-
ently scratching or damaging the flamepath.

Before closing the door, gently clean the flamepath with a soft, non-
abrasive cloth and make sure the surfaces are free of debris.

Do not apply AC power to the analyzer if any of its flamepaths


! appear to be scratched, indented, or worn. Applying power to an
WARNING
analyzer with a damaged flamepath is dangerous and could result
in serious injury or death and/or serious damage to equipment.

Replace the parts immediately if damage or wear is apparent. Contact


AMETEK immediately if there is any doubt about the integrity of any
flamepath.

Before opening the analyzer’s EEx d Upper/Lower Enclosure, follow


! all necessary safety procedures to ensure the area is nonhazardous
WARNING (main AC power to the analyzer is off, explosive gas atmosphere is
not present, etc.).

Before performing maintenance on the analyzer, shut off the main


AC power and all alternate power supplies (if used) to the analyzer.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-35


Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
! gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.
WARNING
Do not remove the cover of the Digital Communications Port on the
front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power up the laptop computer
if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

Do not open the Upper/Lower Enclosures if there is a hazardous gas


atmosphere present.

The Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers have a built-in error detection
system that continuously monitors the operation of key parameters. An
error can be detected by either the Host Controller or the Microcontroller
and can be of two types: Fault and Warning. An error is annunciated by
the Fault Status relay or the Warning Status relay. If the analyzer is com-
municating with the Configurator Software, the particular condition that
causes an error and the type of error are shown in the HC Scode and MC
Scode alarm lists on the Status tab (Figure 6-13).

Figure 6-13.
Status tab (Model 932).

6-36 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


A Warning indicates that the analyzer may require service and the data
may be suspect. Though all warning errors cause the Warning Status relay
to de-energize, this relay can also indicate one of these analyzer operating
conditions:

• Performing a gas calibration (e.g., Auto-Zero, Zero, Span).

• Performing an analog output calibration.

• Performing Optical Bench setup.

• Flow Control is not in “auto”.

The Warning Status relay returns to the normal energized state automati-
cally when the offending error condition is corrected and/or the analyzer
completes one of the above operations.

A Fault indicates that a failure has been detected and the analyzer data is
invalid. Under the Fault situation, the analyzer de-energizes the Fault
Status relay and switches the sample system into shut-in/off mode, if the
Flow Control setting is “auto” (set to “0”). If the Fault Status relay is
configured as non-latching (Enable latching of fail alarm on the Alarm
Setting and Stream Switch Parameters dialog box is unchecked), the relay
returns to its normal energized state and the sample system is switched
back to sampling state when the offending error condition is corrected.
However, if the Fault Status relay is configured as latching (Enable latch-
ing of fail alarm on the Alarm Setting and Stream Switch Parameters
dialog box is checked), the operator must unlatch the relay in one of the
following ways:

• If the Alarm Enable digital input is permanently wired to the enable


state, view the Status tab and click the Conc. Alarm Soft Enable
On/Off button to temporarily Disable the Concentration Alarms and
then click it again to Enable them.

• If the Alarm Enable digital input is wired to a customer’s data acqui-


sition system, have the system toggle that line from Enabled to
Disabled and then back to Enabled at least one second later.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-37


Host Controller Board Error Conditions and
Corrective Action
Figure 6-14 lists valid alarm error messages that originate from the Host
Controller board, descriptions of the errors, and suggested corrective
action The letter ‘f ’ preceding the error condition indicates it is a Fault,
while ‘w’ indicates it is a Warning.

Host Controller error conditions are displayed automatically by the


Configurator Software in the HC Scode alarm list on the Status tab (see
Figure 6-13). The error is displayed if the error condition exists; otherwise
nothing is displayed.

Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action


w: EEPROM full This Warning condition indicates the EEPROM (nonvolatile
memory) has exceeded the safe number of times that
configuration data has been rewritten to it (95 % used). This
alarm error will remain active (set) until the EEPROM is replaced.
Corrective Action:
• Replace the EEPROM at the next scheduled analyzer
service. Refer to the section titled “EEPROM
Replacement” in this chapter.
w: Analog output range This Warning condition indicates one or more of the output
channels exceeded its normal operating full-scale range by
more than 5 %.
Corrective Action:
• View the Output Setup dialog box and check that the
High Scale ranges are correct for the current sample. If
necessary, adjust the range and recalibrate the analyzer
from this dialog box. See also “Analog Output
Calibration” in Chapter 5 for more information. If this
warning persists during normal operation, contact
AMETEK.
w: Probe temperature range This Warning condition indicates the probe temperature has
exceeded its Too Hot setpoint.
Note: This Warning error is used only by analyzers using an
unheated sample probe (not controlling the sample
probe).
Corrective Action:
• View the Temperature Control dialog box and check the
Probe Setpoint and Too Hot setpoint values. This set point
should be 5 °C to 10 °C above the Too Hot temperature.

Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics


Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the Probe temperature sensor (RTD), if installed
– inside the Probe Heater Assembly – for a short or
open circuit. Contact AMETEK for assistance and to
verify operation before removing this component.

Figure 6-14.
Host Controller error
conditions/diagnostics.

6-38 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
w: Excessive zero drift This Warning condition indicates excessive Zero Drift, such as
when Zero Gas transmission values attained after a Zero
function have exceeded user-specified values.
Corrective Action:
• Perform a zero calibration. See Chapter 5 for calibration
information.
• From the Analyzer Data tab, check the Bench
Temperature under Temperature Zones to ensure it
has stabilized.
• From the Status tab, check the HC Scode and MC Scode
alarm lists for error messages that indicate contaminated
Measuring Cell, optics, and/or sample system.
If necessary, clean the appropriate component(s) of the
sample system that require cleaning.
• View the Gas Calibration dialog box and ensure the
ZCalDriftSpec is appropriate and has not been changed.
• This Warning condition may also indicate that one or
both lamps need to be replaced, especially if a “w: ALC
out of range” error message is also displayed on the
Status tab (in the MC Scode alarm list).
For information about when and how to change out
source lamps, refer to “Source Lamp Replacement,”
earlier in this chapter.
w: Cal gas pressure range This Warning condition indicates the calibration gas pressure is
outside of 1 % to 99 % of full-scale range.
Note: This Warning error is used only by analyzers with the
pressure transducer option.
Corrective Action:
• Check the regulator on the calibration gas cylinder and
ensure it has an adequate supply.
• Check the Calibration Gas Pressure Gauge and, if
necessary, adjust the Calibration Gas Pressure
Regulator until it is at an appropriate level, as
recommended on the system drawings.
• View the Output Setup dialog box and confirm that the
calibration gas Low Scale and High Scale pressure
settings are correct.
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the pressure transducer.
• Check the zero solenoid.
• Confirm that the pressure transducer jumpers on the
Customer I/O board are configured correctly. For more
information about Measuring Cell pressure jumper
configurations, refer to “Cell/Miscellaneous
(Compensation) Parameters” in Chapter 4.
• Replace the Customer I/O board. Contact AMETEK to
verify operation before removing this board.

Figure 6-14.
Host Controller error
conditions/diagnostics.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-39


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
w: Sample gas pressure too high This Warning condition indicates the sample gas pressure is
above 99 % of the full-scale range.
Note: This Warning error is used only by analyzers with the
pressure transducer option.
Corrective Action:
• Check the Sample Gas Pressure Gauge and, if
necessary, adjust the Sample Gas Pressure Regulator
until the sample gas is at an appropriate flow and
pressure, as recommended on the system drawings.
• View the Output Setup dialog box and confirm that the
sample gas Low Scale and High Scale pressure
settings are correct.
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the pressure transducer.
• Confirm that the pressure transducer jumpers on the
Customer I/O board are configured correctly. For more
information about Measuring Cell pressure jumper
configurations, refer to “Cell/Miscellaneous
(Compensation) Parameters” in Chapter 4.
w / f: Low flow detected This Warning or Fault condition indicates a low sample gas flow
has been detected. This alarm will be delayed by the amount of
seconds entered in the Activation Time Delay field on the Alarm
Setting and Stream Switch Parameters dialog box.
Note: This alarm is used only if the analyzer is equipped with a
flow switch.
This alarm is factory-set as a Warning or a Fault from the
Alarm Type field in the Alarm Setting and Stream Switch
Parameters dialog box, based on customer
requirements. A warning indicates the data is suspect (the
analyzer requires service); a fault indicates the data is
invalid due to a serious failure having been detected – the
analyzer will switch the sample system to shut-in/off
mode.
Corrective Action:
• Check the valves to ensure they are open.
• Check the sample system to ensure there is adequate
flow and there are no plugs.
• If your system uses an aspirator to move the sample
gas, adjust the aspirator air to ensure a proper flow rate,
as indicated on analyzer drawings.
Also, check the aspirator air line for damage or bends.
• Check the flow switch for plugs and/or for an open
circuit.
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the Micro-Interface board by simulating the low
flow switch output.

Figure 6-14.
Host Controller error
conditions/diagnostics.

6-40 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
f: HC-OBMC communication problem
This serious system Fault condition indicates the Host Controller
board cannot establish reliable communication with the
Microcontroller board.
Corrective Action:
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Reset the analyzer.
If the Lower Enclosure door is closed, take appropriate
safety precautions to safely shut down the analyzer and
cycle the analyzer AC power off for a minimum of 15
seconds before cycling it on again.
If this doesn’t correct the error, view the Info dialog box
and click the HC Reset button to reset the Host
Controller board.
If this still doesn’t correct the error, take appropriate
safety precautions, open the Electronics Enclosure
covers, and:
- Reset the Host Controller board (press SW100, Lower
Enclosure – see Figure 6-12).
- Reset the Microcontroller board (press SW400, Upper
Enclosure – see Figure 6-16).
• Check the connections of the cable between the Host
Controller (J300) and Micro-Interface (J104) boards.
Inspect it for damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).
• Replace the Microcontroller, Host Controller, and/or
Micro-Interface boards. Contact AMETEK to verify
operation before removing any of these boards.
f: Analytical data not received This serious system Fault condition indicates the Host Controller
board is not receiving analytical data from the Microcontroller
board.
Corrective Action:
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Reset the analyzer.
If the Lower Enclosure door is closed, take appropriate
safety precautions to safely shut down the analyzer and
cycle the analyzer AC power off for a minimum of 15
seconds before cycling it on again.
If this doesn’t correct the error, view the Info dialog box
and click the HC Reset button to reset the Host
Controller board.
If this still doesn’t correct the error, take appropriate
safety precautions, open the Electronics Enclosure
covers, and:
- Reset the Host Controller board (press SW100, Lower
Enclosure – see Figure 6-12).
- Reset the Microcontroller board (press SW400, Upper
Enclosure – see Figure 6-16).
(continued next page)

Figure 6-14.
Host Controller error
conditions/diagnostics.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-41


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
Corrective Action (continued):
• Check the connections of the cable between the Host
Controller (J300) and Micro-Interface (J104) boards.
Inspect it for damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks, etc.).
• Replace the Microcontroller, Host Controller, and/or
Micro-Interface boards. Contact AMETEK to verify
operation before removing any of these boards.
f: Sample gas pressure too low This Fault condition indicates the sample pressure is below 1 %
of the full-scale range.
Note: This Fault error is used only by analyzers with the
pressure transducer option.
Corrective Action:
• Check the Sample Gas Pressure Gauge and, if
necessary, adjust the Sample Gas Pressure Regulator
until the sample gas is at an appropriate flow and
pressure, as recommended on the system drawings.
• View the Output Setup dialog box and confirm that the
sample gas Low Scale and High Scale pressure
settings are correct.
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the solenoids.
• Check for leaks in the sample system. Refer to “Sample
System Leak Check” in Chapter 3.
• Check the pressure transducer.
• Replace the Customer I/O board. Contact AMETEK to
verify operation before removing this board.
f: On-Chip A/D not responding This Fault condition indicates the Host Controller board’s internal
analog-to-digital converter (ADC) is not responding.
Corrective Action:
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Replace the Host Controller board. Contact AMETEK to
verify operation before removing this board.
f: Probe temperature too low This Fault condition indicates the Heated Acid Gas Probe
temperature is below its Too Cold setpoint.
Note: This Fault error is used only by analyzers using
(controlling) the Heated Acid Gas Probe option.
Corrective Action:
• View the Temperature Control dialog box and check the
Probe Setpoint and Too Cold setpoint values.
(continued next page)

Figure 6-14.
Host Controller error
conditions/diagnostics.

6-42 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
Corrective Action (continued):
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the heater control circuit:
- Check fuse F3 on the AC Distribution PWB in the
Lower Enclosure (see Figure 6-15). Replace if
necessary.
• Check the Probe temperature sensor (RTD) – inside the
Probe Heater Assembly – for a short or an open circuit.
Contact AMETEK for assistance and to verify
operation before removing this component.

Refer to the Heated Acid Gas Sample Probe Installation


& Maintenance Guide for a maintenance procedure to
replace this part.
f: Probe temperature too high This Fault condition indicates the Heated Acid Gas Probe
temperature is above its Too Hot setpoint.
Note: This Fault error is used only by analyzers using
(controlling) the Heated Acid Gas Probe option.
Corrective Action:
• View the Temperature Control dialog box and check the
Probe Setpoint and Too Hot setpoint values.
• Check the ambient temperature around the analyzer; if it
is higher than the Too Hot setpoint, adjust the
surrounding temperature to within the Probe measuring
range (see “Temperature Control” in Chapter 4 for
details).
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the heater control circuit:
- Check fuse F3 on the AC Distribution PWB in the
Lower Enclosure (see Figure 6-15). Replace if
necessary.
• Check the Probe temperature sensor (RTD) – inside the
Probe Heater Assembly – for a short or an open circuit.
Contact AMETEK for assistance and to verify
operation before removing this component.

Refer to the Heated Acid Gas Sample Probe Installation


& Maintenance Guide for a maintenance procedure to
replace this part.

Figure 6-14.
Host Controller error
conditions/diagnostics.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-43


Figure 6-15.
AC Distribution PWB
(P/N 100-1771).

6-44 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Figure 6-16.
Microcontroller board
(P/N 100-1781).

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-45


Microcontroller Board Error Conditions and
Corrective Action
Figure 6-17 lists valid alarm error messages that originate from the
Microcontroller board, descriptions of the errors, and suggested correc-
tive actions.

Microcontroller error conditions are displayed automatically by the


Configurator Software in the MC Scode alarm list on the Status tab (see
Figure 6-13). The error is displayed if the error condition exists; otherwise
nothing is displayed.

Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action


w: PMT signal out of range This Warning condition indicates the signal from either the
Measure or Reference PMT (photomultiplier tube) is outside its
normal range of between 2500 mV and 9840 mV. View these
signals from the Optical Bench Data tab.
Corrective Action:
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the flat cables between the Optical Bench Service
Electronics board and Optical Bench for proper
connections and inspect them for damage (cuts, nicks,
burn marks, etc.).
• Initiate an Auto-Setup function. Refer to “The Auto-Setup
Sequence,” in this chapter for information.
• Replace the lamp(s), if necessary. For information on
how to determine if the lamps need to be replaced and
how to change out source lamps, refer to “Source Lamp
Replacement,” in this chapter.
• Replace the Optical Bench Service Electronics and/or
PMT Buffer board. Contact AMETEK to verify operation
before removing these boards.
w: ALC out of range This Warning condition indicates one or both lamp pulse current-
control signals has exceeded its Lamp Maximum signal set
point.
This error may occur during a cold start, but should clear after the
source lamps have stabilized.
Corrective Action:
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check that the lamp sockets are attached securely to the
lamps and that the Lamp Adjustment Plate is in place.
• Check that the lamps are inserted completely into the
detector assembly.
(continued next page)

Figure 6-14.
Host Controller error
conditions/diagnostics.

6-46 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
Corrective Action (continued):
• Check the flat cables between the Optical Bench Service
Electronics board and Optical Bench for proper
connections and inspect them for damage (cuts, nicks,
burn marks, etc.).
• This Warning condition may also indicate that one or
both lamps need to be replaced, especially if a
“w: Excessive zero drift” error message is also
displayed on the Status tab (in the HC Scode alarm list).

The light levels may be too low as a result of natural aging


of the lamps. This is an indication that the lamps are
nearing the end of their useful lives and should be
replaced. As a temporary solution, initiate an Auto-Setup to
increase the PMT gain to compensate for the reduced light
levels. Refer to “The Auto-Setup Sequence,” in this
chapter for information.
w: Cell temperature out of range This Warning condition indicates the Measuring Cell
temperature has exceeded its Too Hot setpoint, fallen below its
Too Cold setpoint, or the Measuring Cell temperature range is
not set properly.
Note: This Warning error is used only by analyzers using an
unheated Measuring Cell.
Corrective Action:
View the Temperature Control dialog box and check the Cell
Too Hot and Too Cold setpoints. Also, check the Cell
temperature Range – it should be set to the Cell Temp RTD
Range indicated on the Analyzer Programming Parameters
sheet included in the “Supplement Information” tab of this
manual and the Documentation Package shipped with the
analyzer. See also “Temperature Control” in Chapter 4 for
more details.
Perform the following checks:
• Check the ambient temperature around the analyzer; if it
is higher than the Too Hot setpoint or lower than the Too
Cold setpoint, adjust the surrounding temperature to
within the Cell temperature measuring Range.
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the jumpers at JP300 on the Micro-Interface
board for proper temperature range setting. Verify the
Range and compare it to the jumper settings listed
under “Temperature Control” in Chapter 4.
• Check the Measuring Cell temperature sensor (Cell
RTD) in the Upper Enclosure – see Figure 6-1 for
location – for a short or open circuit. Replace the RTD, if
necessary. Contact AMETEK to verify operation before
removing this component.
• Replace the Micro-Interface board. Contact AMETEK to
verify operation before removing this board.

Figure 6-14.
Host Controller error
conditions/diagnostics.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-47


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
w: Bench temperature out of range
This Warning condition indicates the Optical Bench temperature
has exceeded its Too Hot setpoint or has fallen below its Too Cold
setpoint, or the Optical Bench temperature range is not set
properly.
Corrective Action:
View the Temperature Control dialog box and check the
Bench Too Hot and Too Cold setpoints. Also, check the
Bench temperature Range – it should be set to the Optical
Bench Temp Range indicated on the Analyzer Programming
Parameters sheet included in the “Supplement Information”
tab of this manual and the Documentation Package shipped
with the analyzer. See also “Temperature Control” in
Chapter 4 for more details.
Perform the following checks:
• Check the ambient temperature around the analyzer. If it
is lower than the Too Cold setpoint, it is okay; if it is
higher than the Too Hot setpoint, adjust the surrounding
temperature so that it is not higher the 8 °C below the
Bench Setpoint.
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the jumpers at JP301 on the Micro-Interface
board for proper temperature range setting. Verify the
Range and compare it to the jumper settings listed
under “Temperature Control” in Chapter 4.
• Check the Optical Bench temperature sensor (Optical
Bench RTD) in the Upper Enclosure – see Figure 6-1 for
location – for a short or open circuit. Replace the RTD, if
necessary. Contact AMETEK to verify operation before
removing this part.
• Check the heater control circuit:
- Check fuse F4 on the AC Distribution PWB in the
Lower Enclosure – see Figure 6-15. Replace if
necessary.
- Check the thermo-switch (OverTemp Switch) on the
Optical Bench Assembly. If the plunger has popped
out, press it in to reset it (see Figure 6-1 for location).
• Replace the Micro-Interface board. Contact AMETEK to
verify operation before removing this board.

Figure 6-17.
Microcontroller error
conditions/diagnostics.

6-48 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
w: Bench auto-setup problem This Warning condition indicates problems with the operation of
the Optical Bench Assembly during an Auto-Setup function.
This alarm will also be set if any of the Default Filter Pulses
values are greater than the Lamp Max signal or less than the
Lamp Base signal.
This alarm will also be set if the PMT Level or PMT Balance
value is greater than 9840 mV or less than 2500 mV.
Corrective Action:
View the Optical Bench dialog box and check for deviations
outside of these ranges.
Perform the following checks, correct any faults, and restart
the Auto-Setup function:
• Ensure that the Measuring Cell was zeroed.
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Make sure the source lamps are not burned out.
• Ensure the lamp sockets are attached securely to the
lamps.
• Ensure the lamps are inserted completely into the
detector assembly.
• Make sure the lamp power supply cables are connected
and not damaged.
• Ensure the PMT high-voltage (JP100, JP101) and flat
(J103) cables are connected and not damaged.
• Align the source lamps and restart the Auto-Setup.
• Adjust the jumper positions located at P300 and P301
on the Optical Bench Service Electronics board. Refer
to “Manipulating the PMT Level and PMT Balance” and
Figure 6-11, earlier in this chapter, for a description of
the effects on the PMT Balance and PMT Level in
relation to different jumper positions.
• Ensure the Measuring Cell windows are clean and not
damaged.
• Ensure the Measuring Cell is clean.
• Check and clean, if necessary, the steering mirror in the
PMT Block. Contact AMETEK to verify operation before
removing this board.

Figure 6-17.
Microcontroller error
conditions/diagnostics.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-49


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
f: Filter wheel speed out of range This Fault condition indicates there is no signal from the filter
wheel opto-interruptor, or the filter wheel speed is outside the
normal range of 240–600 RPM.
Note: This Fault error is used only by Model 932 Multi-Gas
Analyzers.
Corrective Action:
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the power (15 V) on the opto-coupler cable to
ensure there is power being supplied to the filter wheel
motor.
• Check the power on the filter wheel motor. Contact
AMETEK to verify operation before checking.
• Check the opto-coupler cable to the Chopper Assembly
for proper connections and inspect it for damage (cuts,
nicks, burn marks, etc.).
• Check the clip-ring for the filter wheel shaft and ensure it
is snug against the bushing. Contact AMETEK to verify
operation before checking.
• Check the filter wheel bearings. Contact AMETEK to
verify operation before checking.
• Replace the Microcontroller board. Contact AMETEK to
verify operation before removing this board.
f: On-board A/D not responding This Fault condition indicates one or both of the Microcontroller
board’s discrete analog-to-digital converters (ADC) is not
responding.
Corrective Action:
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Replace one or both of the A/D converters. Contact
AMETEK to verify operation before removing these
components.
• Replace the Microcontroller board. Contact AMETEK to
verify operation before removing this board.
f: On-chip A/D not responding This Fault condition indicates the Microcontroller board’s internal
analog-to-digital converter (ADC) is not responding.
Corrective Action:
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Replace the Microcontroller board. Contact AMETEK to
verify operation before removing this board.

Figure 6-17.
Microcontroller error
conditions/diagnostics.

6-50 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
f: OBMC-HC communication problem
This Fault condition indicates the Microcontroller board cannot
establish reliable communications with the Host Controller
board.
Corrective Action:
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Reset the analyzer.
If the Lower Enclosure door is closed, take appropriate
safety precautions to safely shut down the analyzer and
cycle the analyzer AC power off for a minimum of 15
seconds before cycling it on again.
If this doesn’t correct the error, view the Info dialog box
and click the HC Reset button to reset the Host
Controller board.
If this still doesn’t correct the error, take appropriate
safety precautions, open the Electronics Enclosure
covers, and:
- Reset the Host Controller board (press SW100, Lower
Enclosure – see Figure 6-12).
- Reset the Microcontroller board (press SW400, Upper
Enclosure – see Figure 6-16).
• Check the connections of the cable between the Host
Controller (J300) and Micro-Interface (J104) boards.
Also, inspect it for damage (cuts, nicks, burn marks,
etc.).
• Replace the Microcontroller, Host Controller, and/or
Micro-Interface boards. Contact AMETEK to verify
operation before removing any of these boards.
f: Cell temperature out of range This Fault condition indicates the Measuring Cell temperature
has exceeded its Too Hot setpoint, fallen below its Too Cold
setpoint, or the Measuring Cell temperature range is not set
properly.
Note: This Fault error is used only by analyzers using a heated
Measuring Cell.
Corrective Action:
View the Temperature Control dialog box and check the Cell
Too Hot and Too Cold setpoints. Also, check the Cell
temperature Range – it should be set to the Cell Temp RTD
Range indicated on the Analyzer Programming Parameters
sheet included in the “Supplement Information” tab of this
manual and the Documentation Package shipped with the
analyzer. See also “Temperature Control” in Chapter 4 for
more details.
(continued next page)

Figure 6-17.
Microcontroller error
conditions/diagnostics.

Maintenance & Troubleshooting | 6-51


Alarm Type / Error Condition Description & Suggested Corrective Action
Corrective Action (continued):
Perform the following checks:
• For unheated Measuring Cells, check the ambient
temperature around the analyzer; if it is higher than the
Too Hot setpoint, adjust the surrounding temperature to
within the Cell temperature measuring Range.
Take appropriate safety precautions, open the Electronics
Enclosure covers, and:
• Check the jumpers at JP300 on the Micro-Interface
board for proper temperature range setting. Verify the
Range and compare it to the jumper settings listed
under “Temperature Control” in Chapter 4.
• Check the Measuring Cell temperature sensor (Cell
RTD) in the Upper Enclosure – see Figure 6-1 for
location – for a short or open circuit. Replace the RTD, if
necessary. Contact AMETEK to verify operation before
removing this component.
• Replace the Micro-Interface board. Contact AMETEK to
verify operation before removing this board.

Analyzer Reset
Should a situation arise where the Host Controller board or the
Microcontroller board must be reset, take appropriate safety precautions
and cycle the AC power to the analyzer off for a minimum of 15 seconds
before cycling it on again.

If this doesn’t correct the error, view the Info dialog box and click the HC
Reset button.

If this still doesn’t correct the error, take appropriate safety precautions,
open the Electronics Enclosure covers, and:

• Reset the Host Controller board (press SW100, Lower Enclosure – see
Figure 6-12).

• Reset the Microcontroller board (press SW400, Upper Enclosure –


see Figure 6-16).

Do not randomly reset the analyzer during normal operation.


! Typically, the only resets required are in cases where the Host
CAUTION
Controller or Microcontroller boards have been replaced. In this
case, it is necessary to shut down the analyzer. The analyzer will
reset upon normal power-up.

6-52 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers


SERVICE & PARTS

The Service & Parts chapter discusses what to do if you need technical
support from AMETEK, or if you are returning parts for service. This
chapter also lists the recommended spare parts to have on hand to ensure
all consumable and replaceable parts are available for service according to
the “Preventive Maintenance Schedule” in Chapter 6.

Technical Support
AMETEK Western Research is committed to providing you the best
technical support in the industry. If you need service or application
assistance, contact your local or nearest AMETEK Service Centre or the
AMETEK factory AMETEK at (403) 235-8400 or 1-800-661-9198, or contact
your local AMETEK Western Research representative.

Before contacting AMETEK with questions regarding the installation,


operation, or maintenance/troubleshooting of your analyzer system,
carefully review the contents of this manual. If you are unable to find an
explanation for your problem in this manual, please gather the following
information prior to contacting AMETEK:

• Model number of the analyzer.

• Serial number of the analyzer.

• Purchase order number.

• AMETEK part number for the specific component you are enquiring
about, if known.

• Information describing the problem.

• Billing address, shipping address, and telephone number.

Service and Parts | 7-1


Returning Equipment
If you need to return parts or equipment for repair, you will need a Re-
turn Material Authorization (RMA) number. This will ensure your equip-
ment is serviced and returned to you in a prompt and efficient manner. To
obtain an RMA number, contact your local or nearest AMETEK Service
Centre and have the following information available:

• Model number of the analyzer.

• Serial number of the analyzer.

• Purchase order number.

• Billing address, shipping address, and telephone number.

7-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


?? ANSWERS TO YOUR QUESTIONS ??
The choice is yours...
Whether by phone or in person, we can meet the needs required to keep
your analyzer running at peak performance. Our factories are located in
Calgary, Alberta and Newark, Delaware with a Sales & Service Centre in
Houston, Texas. Depending on the programs you select, we will have a
factory-trained representative talking to you within minutes – 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year or on-site within 24 hours. We stock parts at all three
MINUTES OR HOURS, locations.
WE'RE THERE FOR YOU
ANYTIME / ANYWHERE
AMETEK SERVICE & AFTERMARKET SALES SUPPORT
• PRE-lNSTALLATlON INSPECTIONS • ASAP
To ensure you order the correct analyzer with the AMETEK SERVICE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM.
options your operation requires, schedule a fac- AMETEK’s exclusive ASAP program lets you se-
tory-trained Service Engineer to inspect the pro- lect a service package from a menu of service
posed analyzer location. The on-site charge for options. ASAP options include 24 hour phone
this visit can be deducted from the start-up charge support, 24 hour on-site guarantee, rapid parts
if you select that option. shipment, and many more service benefits. ASAP
plans may be written to provide coverage for a
• START UPS
single analyzer, or all of the AMETEK process
Your decision to buy an AMETEK analyzer is
analyzers at your facility.
greatly appreciated. After the time and money
spent on your analyzer, wouldn’t you expect a fast • AFTERMARKET SALES
and successful start up? We can ensure that will Our Aftermarket Sales group will keep you sup-
happen! Schedule us to be there before you power plied with the parts to maintain your analyzer to
up the system. We will guarantee a satisfactory factory specifications. This is also the group that
commissioning of your analyzer. will keep your analyzer current with upgrades
and retrofits.
• WARRANTY VALIDATION
Upon start-up, we will validate your 1 year war-
ranty. AMETEK’s warranty policy covers all parts • TECHNICAL SUPPORT
and on-site time. Incurred costs will be the respon- Just call AMETEK and a factory trained Service
sibility of the customer. Engineer will be there to answer your questions.
With over 200 years of combined field service
• WARRANTY EXTENSIONS
experience, our engineers are available to provide
AMETEK offers a 2 or 3 year warranty extension
operational support or troubleshooting expertise.
for your analyzers. The warranty is identical to the
original policy supplied with the analyzer. Con- • TRAINING
tact AMETEK Service for more details. We will train your service technicians at our Tech-
nology Transfer Centres located in Calgary, New-
• SPARE PARTS KITS
ark, or at your facility. Our TTCs have equipment
These parts allow each customer to properly main-
similar to yours for hands-on training. A diploma
tain their analyzers according to the recommended
will be presented upon completion of the course.
Preventive Maintenance Schedule (listed in the
manual), to ensure optimal operations.

PROCESS INSTRUMENTS
Canada: 1-800-661-9198 U.S.A.: 1-800-537-6044

Service and Parts | 7-3


Recommended Spare Parts
This section lists the recommended spare parts to have readily available
for the analyzer.

Optical Bench/Sample System Spare Parts


AMETEK recommends having spare parts available (for the Optical Bench
and sample system) to ensure your analyzer will operate at peak effi-
ciency. The replacement of these parts is required as part of the Preventive
Maintenance Schedule. It is also necessary to have these parts on hand in
case the parts become damaged or contaminated, and need to be re-
placed.

Because the Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers are designed to accom-
modate a wide variety of applications (and therefore can accommodate a
variety of sample system components), there is no typical spare parts list
available for the Optical Bench and sample system.

IMPORTANT SPARE PARTS INFORMATION


 Spare Parts lists for the Optical Bench and all sample system compo-
NOTE nents (including optional Heated Measuring Cells) are included in
the “Supplemental Information” tab of this manual, or in the Docu-
mentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

Before ordering spare parts, refer to the Custom Spare Parts list (or
Measuring Cell assembly drawings) in the “Supplemental Informa-
tion” tab of this manual or the Documentation Package included with
the analyzer. Use the Part Numbers in this list.

Parts that require scheduled replacement (or due to damage) includes, but
is not limited to, source lamps, Measuring Cell o-rings and windows,
Measuring Cells (heated or unheated), and Chopper Bearing Wheel
(Model 932 Multi-Gas Analyzers only). If optional equipment, such as
AMETEK’s Heated Acid Gas Probe, is used with your system, additional
spare parts for the probe will also be required (listed in the Heated Acid
Gas Probe Installation & Maintenance Guide).

7-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Spare Analyzer Fuses
AMETEK recommends to have on-site the following spare fuses for the
analyzer. These fuses do not need to be changed out at regular intervals,
but AMETEK recommends that these fuses be available in case a fuse
blows and a replacement is needed. Recommended fuses include:

Fuses, Model 931/932 Analyzer – Recommended Parts to Have On-Site


120 V 240 V
Description (Location*) Part No. Fuse Type Part No. Fuse Type
Upper Enclosure (F4) 300-9839 2.0 A 300-9244 1.0 A
Probe Heater (F3) 300-9839 2.0 A 300-9244 1.0 A
DC Power Supply (F2) 300-9244 1.0 A 300-9244 1.0 A
Main (F1) 300-9838 4.0 A 300-9839 2.0 A
* These fuses are located on the AC Distribution PWB in the Lower Enclosure.

Fuses, Optical Bench Service Electronics Board – Recommended Parts to Have On-Site
120 V 240 V
Description (Location*) Part No. Fuse Type Part No. Fuse Type
Main Board (F200) 300-8778 125 mA 300-8777 63 mA
Photomultiplier Tube (F300) 300-3214 0.2 A 300-3214 0.2 A
Lamp (F201) 300-9524 32 mA 300-9524 32 mA
* These fuses are located on the Optical Bench Service Electronics PWB in the Upper Enclosure.

Printed Wiring Board Re-Ordering Part Numbers


If you require replacement boards for the Model 931 or Model 932 UV
Analyzer, use the following part numbers to order the board(s) you need.

Printed Wiring Boards – Recommended Parts to Have On-Site


Description (Location) Part No. Qty Warranty
Customer I/O Board (Lower Enclosure) 100-1758 1 1 Year
Host Controller Board (Lower Enclosure) 100-1757 1 1 Year
Microcontroller Board (Upper Enclosure) 100-1781 1 1 Year
Micro-Interface Board (Upper Enclosure) 100-1898 1 1 Year
Optical Bench Service Electronics Board 100-1841 1 1 Year
c/w bracket (Upper Enclosure)
PMT Buffer Board (Lower Enclosure)* 100-0140 1 1 Year
* This PWB is located in the Detector Block portion of the Optical Bench Assembly.

Service and Parts | 7-5


This page intentionally left blank.

7-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


APPENDIX A – ADVANCED
SOFTWARE OPERATION

If potentially flammable gases or vapors are present, do not open any


! covers without first disconnecting power to the analyzer.
CAUTION

Before proceeding to connect devices or power-up a computer in a


! hazardous area, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous gases
WARNING
and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.

Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-


tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power-up
the computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation | A-1


Assigning Inputs to Channels for Display Modes
To define the parameters to be monitored by a display mode you assign
inputs to channels. These input channels are limited only by the number
of settings able to be defined in the display window for that mode. The
most commonly used input channels are those for the species or gases
that are monitored. Most of the other inputs that can be selected are used
for diagnostic purposes.

To select one or more input channels to display on your screen:

1. Select a mode in which to display the parameters that you will ob-
serve. This can be done by either selecting a mode from the Mode
menu or by clicking on the mode icon on the Standard Toolbar.

2. Right-click on the mode window to be defined and then click Scan


from the context menu to view the Properties dialog box. The Scan tab
will be active.

 For Trend and Tabular modes, you must first select a Channel before
you can define scan settings. Refer to “Defining Scan Settings” in
NOTE
Chapter 4 for detailed information about how to assign inputs to
channels for scanning data.

3. Click Device under Data Source and select the device from which to
set up. If only one device (analyzer) is being used, only Dev1 will be
displayed.

When Device is selected, the Input Channel list box is also displayed
and enabled. From this list, select a signal that you want to display in
the selected area on your mode display window by clicking on it.
(View this list to see the parameters that can be monitored.)

To temporarily disable an input, you can select it and then select


Disabled. Only that input will be disabled.

4. Click OK when finished.

A-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Modes of Operation
Any settings you define for a mode will be retained by the system when
you change the mode or exit the program.

Any display or scan parameters that you define for a mode will not be
transferred to a new mode when you switch modes. However, the system
will continue to scan when you change modes.

Meter Mode
Meter mode allows you to view information in a meter-type format
(Figure A-1). You can assign the parameters in the Input Channel list box
(Scan tab) to any one of 12 meters. Alarms can be set up and displayed on
the meter to view the current reading in relation to the defined High and
Low alarm limits. You can also define unique scan, display, and alarm
output settings.

Figure A-1.
Meter mode display.

While working in Meter mode:

• Each meter has a bar representing a measured value. Text under the
meter displays the numeric value of the measured parameter.

• Each meter can be set to display alarm limits. As long as the measured
value is within the High and Low alarm limits, the meter bar appears
in green.

A yellow meter bar indicates an alarm warning condition.

A red meter bar indicates an alarm fault condition.

Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation | A-3


• Any other actions associated with alarms are activated if the limit is
exceeded (e.g., running an information file, or setting off a digital or
analog output).

• Before changing meter properties, you must select the meter by


clicking on it. The meter will be highlighted with a yellow border when
selected.

To set up a Meter mode display:

1. Select Meter from the Mode menu or click from the Standard
Toolbar.

2. Select a meter by clicking on one. A yellow border around the meter


indicates it is active.

3. Right-click the active meter and define the Scan, Display, and/or
Alarm settings for the meter.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for additional meters.

5. Click to start scanning, and again to stop scanning data.

A-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Annunciator Mode
Annunciator mode (Figure A-2) allows you to track whether a measured
parameter is within acceptable user-defined limits using a simple color/
text indication. You can assign the parameters in the Input Channel list
box (Scan tab) to any one of 12 annunciator display windows.

Figure A-2.
Annunciator mode
display.

If the level is:

WITHIN the alarm limits defined = GREEN = OK

ABOVE the High alarm warning level = YELLOW = HIGH

ABOVE the High alarm limit = RED = HIGH

BELOW the Low alarm warning level = YELLOW = LOW

BELOW the Low alarm limit = RED = LOW

Annunciator mode also allows you to set up multiple indicators, each


corresponding to a different gas species. You can also define unique scan,
display, and alarm output settings.

Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation | A-5


While working in Annunciator mode:

• Annunciator mode is normally used to define alarm limits so that you


can view – using visual indicators – whether the selected value is
within the alarm limits.

• For each channel, a green display indicates the value is within accept-
able limits.

A yellow display indicates an alarm warning condition.

A red display indicates an alarm fault condition.

• Before changing the display properties, you must select the display by
clicking on it. The display will be highlighted with a yellow border
when selected.

To set up an Annunciator mode display:

1. Select Annunciator from the Mode menu or click on the Stan-


dard Toolbar.

2. Select a display by clicking on one. A yellow border around the dis-


play indicates it is active.

3. Right-click the active display and define the Scan, Display, and/or
Alarm settings for the display.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for additional displays.

5. Click to start scanning, and again to stop scanning data.

A-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Trend Mode
Trend mode allows you to view trends of measured parameters in a
graphical format (Figure A-3). You can assign the parameters in the Input
Channel list box (Scan tab) to any one of 8 channels in Trend Mode. You
can also define unique scan, display, and alarm output settings.

Figure A-3.
Trend mode (graph)
display.

While working in Trend mode:


• The main Trend mode window displays each channel as a colored
line. The Y-axis displays partial pressure or measured value; the X-axis
displays time.

• You can view the exact value of a trend line by holding down the left
mouse button in the trend graphical display area. Display the Data
File Toolbar to view the time of each data point.

To set up a Trend mode graph:

1. Select Trend from the Mode menu or click on the Standard


Toolbar.

2. Select a display by clicking on one. A yellow border around the dis-


play indicates it is active.

3. Right-click the graph and define the Scan, Display, and/or Alarm
settings for the graph.

4. Click to start scanning, and again to stop scanning data.

Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation | A-7


Tabular Mode
Tabular mode allows you to view information in a textual, table-type
format (Figure A-4). You can assign the parameters in the Input Channel
list box (Scan tab) to up to four tables. You can also define unique scan,
display, and alarm output settings.

Figure A-4.
Tabular mode display.

While working in Tabular mode:


• If an alarm was defined and the alarm has been exceeded, an alarm
indicator will appear to the right of the main table.
• You can copy any of the columns from a Tabular display window to
the clipboard. For more information, see also “Copying Magnitudes”
and “Copying Channels” under “About Dynamic Data Exchange
(DDE),” later in this Appendix.
• Before changing the display properties, you must select the display by
clicking on it. The display will be highlighted with a yellow border
when selected.

To set up the software for Tabular mode:

1. Select Tabular from the Mode menu or click on the Standard


Toolbar.

2. Select a display by clicking on one. A yellow border around the dis-


play indicates it is active.

3. Right-click the active display and define the Scan, Display, and/or
Alarm settings for the display.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for additional displays.

5. Click to start scanning, and again to stop scanning data.

A-8 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Custom Modes
Custom mode allows you to create custom setups that can include all
scanning, display, and alarm output options from the other modes. This is
done from the Set Custom Mode Menu dialog box (Figure A-5). Custom
mode setups can include either a single mode display window or multiple
mode display windows. Using Custom mode, you can create a unique
mode display by mixing and matching the best features of various modes.

For example, you can customize the window to show one Meter mode
display window, one Trend mode window, and two Annunciator win-
dows. Or, you could set up two Trend mode display windows, or two
Tabular mode windows.

Three default custom mode setups are included with the Configurator
Software and more can be added as needed. For each display window
added in Custom mode the scanning, displays, and alarm output options
are set as if in that mode.

For example, if adding a Meter mode window within the Custom mode,
all settings for that window are defined as if in Meter mode.

Figure A-5.
Set Custom Mode
Menu dialog box.

To create a Custom mode:

1. From the File menu, select New or click on the Standard


Toolbar.

2. From the Edit menu, select Add Display and select the type of display
you want to add from the list of standard mode types. Or, use the
Custom mode icons on the Custom Mode Toolbar to add different
displays.

3. Specify the data source. Select the applicable source of data from the
Data Source group by clicking Device and then selecting the device
you want to enable.

Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation | A-9


4. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to add others displays, if desired.

5. From the File menu, select Save As to save the Custom mode. Or click

one of the icons on the Standard Toolbar to save the


Custom mode to one of the predefined Custom mode file names
(custom1.dyc, custom2.dyc, or custom3.dyc). Custom mode files are
given a .dyc file extension.

6. Click to start scanning, and again to stop scanning data.

7. To retrieve the Custom mode file at a later time, select Open Configu-
ration from the File menu. If you used one of the predefined icons,
double-click one of the files to retrieve it.

Moving or Resizing a Window in Custom Mode

Select the display window to move or resize. The window is highlighted


with a yellow border.

• To move the window, click and drag the display window to the new
location and then release the mouse button (just an outline of the
window is visible while it is being moved).

• To resize the window, use standard Windows methods.

Adding a Display Window in Custom Mode

1. From the Edit menu, select Add Display. Choose the type of display
window to add.

2. Select the data source for the display window.

3. The system adds a display window to the Custom mode window.

Deleting a Window in Custom Mode

1. Click on the window to delete. The window is highlighted with a


yellow border.

2. From the Edit menu, select Delete Display, press the Del key on the

keyboard, or click on the Custom Mode Toolbar to delete the


display window.

A-10 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Saving Custom Mode Files

1. From the File menu, select Save As. You can save the Custom mode
setup under a new name or use one of the predefined icons.

2. Click the Save button to save the file.

3. By default, the system places these files in the folder where the
Configurator Software is installed and gives the file a .dyc extension.

If you save a Custom mode file in the install folder with the name
“startup.dyc” it will automatically be opened when the program starts.

Opening Custom Mode Files

1. From the File menu, select Open Configuration or click on the


Custom Mode Toolbar.

2. Navigate to the location of the Custom mode file to open.

3. Select the Custom mode file and click Open.

Adding Custom Mode Files to the Mode Menu

1. From the Mode menu, select Set Menu to view the Set Custom Mode
Menu dialog box (Figure A-6). You can associate a Custom mode file to
appear at the bottom of the Mode menu.

You can also provide a menu/button name to appear instead of the file
name at the bottom of the menu.

2. Use the Browse button to navigate to the location of the Custom mode
file.

3. To enter a name that will appear at the bottom of the Mode menu,
enter a name in the Menu/Button Name text field.

4. To recall any of these files, click one of the icons.

Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation | A-11


Saving Tabular Mode Files
The Preferences dialog box (Figure A-6) allows you to set up parameters
that define how the Tabular mode files will be saved.

Figure A-6.
Preferences dialog
box.

To set preferences, select Preferences from the Edit menu.

• DDE Item Separator


Select the character that will separate multiple data items in a Dy-
namic Data Exchange (DDE) message.

• Trend Colors
Set the default trend channel colors.

• Data file size


Set the maximum size for a data file. This can be an integer between 1
and 16. The normal value is 1 megabyte. Setting the data file size to a
higher value will increase the size of your data files as well as the size
of the trend graph buffer. As a result of this increase, it will require
more disk space and memory.

You can copy any of the columns from a Tabular display window to
the clipboard.

A-12 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


About Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)

Copying Magnitudes

You can copy any of the columns from a Tabular display window to the
clipboard.

1. Select Tabular mode.

2. Right-click a table and select Copy Magnitudes from the context


menu. This places the DDE data onto the clipboard.

3. From the Edit menu, select Paste Special (or Paste Link, depending on
the version of Windows running) to create the DDE link and continu-
ously update the data in real time.

Copying Channels

1. Select Tabular mode.

2. Right-click on a table and select Copy Channels from the context


menu. This places the name of the channel onto the clipboard.

3. From the Edit menu, select Paste Special (or Paste Link, depending on
the version of Windows running) to create the DDE link and continu-
ously update the channel names in real time.

 If you are importing data into Microsoft Excel, select Preference from
the Edit menu. To place the numbers into separate columns, select
NOTE
Return from the DDE Item Separator group. To place the numbers
in rows, select Tab.

Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation | A-13


Setting Up the Display
To set up the display for a mode, right-click on a display window and then
click Display from the context menu that appears. The Properties dialog
box is displayed (Figure A-7), with the Display tab active. For modes
using channels – Trend (Figure A-8) and Tabular modes – you must first
select a channel before you can define the scan settings.

Figure A-7.
Display parameters
tab.

Title
Type the title for the display window. It will then appear in the title
bar for that window and in other areas of the software to identify the
display window.

Autoscale check box


Applies to Meter mode only. When selected, the system automatically
sets the Y-axis based on the highest value from the previous scan. This
will also override the Y-axis. As the highest peak increases or de-
creases, the display scale is changed to accommodate the changing
highest peak.

Logarithmic check box


Applies to Trend and Meter modes only.

Checked The software uses a logarithmic scale to


display readings.

Not Checked The software uses a linear scale to display


readings.

A-14 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Upper limit
Applies to Trend and Meter modes only. This value is used only when
the Autoscale check box is not checked. Enter the upper limit to
display on the Y-axis.

Lower limit
Applies to Trend and Meter modes only. This value is used only when
the Autoscale check box is not checked. If the Logarithmic check box
is selected, use this text field to enter the number of logarithmic
decades to display on the Y-axis using the upper limit as the top of the
display range. If the Logarithmic is not checked, enter a value into this
text box for the lower limit.

Units
This is the value in which your results will be displayed.

• In the Units text field, type in the units on which you want the
scanned information displayed.

• Precision
Defines the number of digits after the decimal point to be shown.
For example, if the precision is set to 2, a reading might be 5.22.

Channels
Allows you to select and define attributes for the selected device.

Hide check boxes


Applies to Trend mode only. If checked, the data channel will not be
displayed but will continue to track the data. This is useful when
viewing a scan that overlaps another scan.

Figure A-8.
Display parameters
tab, Trend mode.

Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation | A-15


Channel name
Applies to Trend and Tabular modes only. Names the displayed
channel (Figure A-8). Select one of the Channels buttons and enter a
name for it in the Channel name text field.

Channel color
Applies to Trend mode only. Defines a different color for the displayed
channel. A custom color can also be chosen by clicking on the Custom
button and selecting a color.

Minutes
Applies to Trend mode only. Defines the time interval to include on
the display.

Display Values
If checked, displays channel values in Trend mode.

Hide check boxes


Applies to Trend mode only. If checked, the data channel will not be
displayed but will continue to track the data. This is useful when
viewing a scan that overlaps another scan.

A-16 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Setting Alarms
To set alarms, right-click on a display window and then click Alarms from
the context menu. The Properties dialog box is displayed (Figure A-9),
with the Alarm tab active.

 The alarms discussed in this chapter are used by the Configurator


Software only and are not the same as the Concentration Alarms on
NOTE
the analyzer. The analyzer Concentration Alarms operate indepen-
dently of the Configurator Software.

Figure A-9.
Alarm setup tab.

For Trend and Tabular modes, first select the channel as the source of the
alarms before you define the alarm values. Setting alarms includes defin-
ing alarm limits and defining the actions that should be taken when an
alarm limit is reached. Alarm limits also appear on the main display for
the current mode. High and Low limit alarms appear in red; High and
Low warning alarms appear in yellow.

Enable all alarms

Checked Enables all High and Low alarms.

Not Checked Deactivated – alarms can be deactivated


when, for example, your system is not
operating.

Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation | A-17


High Limit
When checked, enables the High Limit alarm.

Name Enter a name for the alarm that will be used to identify
the alarm to the system.

Value Enter the high (upper) limit value for the alarm.

Count Defines the number of consecutive readings that must


be above the high alarm limit before the alarm is
triggered. Higher count values decrease the possibility
that a transient or noise signal will set off a false alarm.

High Warn
When checked, enables the High Warning alarm.

Name Enter a name for the alarm that will be used to identify
the alarm to the system.

Value Enter the high (upper) limit value for the alarm. Must
be lower than the high alarm value.

Count Defines the number of consecutive readings that must


be above the high alarm warning limit before the alarm
is triggered. Higher count values decrease the possibil-
ity that a transient or noise signal will set off a false
alarm.

Low Warn
When checked, enables the Low Warning alarm.

Name Enter a name for the alarm that will be used to identify
the alarm to the system.

Value Enter the low limit value for the alarm. Must be higher
than the low alarm value. For analog mode, any mass
values that fall below this limit are counted even if they
are from the same scan.

Count Defines the number of consecutive readings that must


be below this limit before the alarm is triggered. Higher
count values decrease the possibility that a transient or
noise signal will set off a false alarm.

A-18 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Low Limit
When checked, enables the Low Limit alarm.

Name Enter a name for the alarm that will be used to identify
the alarm to the system.

Value Enter the low limit value for the alarm.

Count Defines the number of consecutive readings that must


be below this limit before the alarm is triggered. Higher
count values decrease the possibility that a transient or
noise signal will set off a false alarm.

Auto Set button


When selected, this button automatically sets the alarm levels as
follows:

High Limit 10 times greater than the current scan value.


High Warning 5 times greater than the current scan value.
Low Warning 5 times less than the current scan value.
Low Limit 10 times less than the current scan value.

Action button
Choose the Action button to view the Alarm Action dialog box (Fig-
ure A-10), where you can specify what action the system should take
when the specified alarm is set. This can be used for all four alarms.

Dialog Box
Specify a message to display when the alarm is set.

Figure A-10.
Alarm Action dialog
box.

Appendix A – Advanced Software Operation | A-19


Message Enter a message that will be displayed in the Alarm
message box (Figure A-11) when the alarm is set.

Info File Enter the name and path of a help file or use the
Browse button to navigate to the location of a help
file and select the file.

This file will be launched when you click the Infor-


mation button in the Alarm message box that
appears when an alarm is set. For example, the file
could suggest what action to take when the alarm is
triggered. This function is currently not available.

Sound
Enter the name and path of a sound file or use the Browse button to
navigate to the location of the sound files and select a file. This allows
you to activate a warning sound (in addition to text instructions) to
alert the operator when the alarm is set.

Script (Configurator multi only)


Select a script that will perform some automated system instructions
when the alarm is triggered. You create the scripts in the Configurator
Software to perform predetermined actions.

Digital Output
Define how to send the alarm information to a digital output. Select
the device to which you want to send the digital output by using the
Device list box. Select the digital output module using the Module list
box.

Test Dialog button


Click this button to test the alarm. The Alarm message box will appear
(Figure A-11). Click Acknowledge or Disable to close this dialog box.

Figure A-11.
Alarm message dialog
box.

A-20 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


APPENDIX B – OPTIONS

Environmental Purge Option (Field Upgrade Available)


The Environmental Purge option is used to reduce the humidity and
corrosive gas concentrations within the analyzer’s Upper and Lower
Enclosures through inlet and vent flame arrestors added to both enclo-
sures. Environmental purging is recommended in any location where the
relative humidity exceeds 70 % for long periods of time, or where the
surrounding atmosphere contains high trace concentrations of gases that
can corrode optics or electronics (e.g., sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide).

This is an environmental purging option and should not be confused


! with purging actions taken for hazardous area classifications.
CAUTION

Connection and Use


The inlet and vent flame arrestors are located on the left side of the Upper
and Lower Enclosures (see Figure B-1).

• Use a 1/8" NPT female thread connector on the inlet flame arrestors.

• Use stainless steel fittings and tubing to connect clean and dry air or
nitrogen to both inlet flame arrestors. Refer to system drawings for
recommended pressure setting and other requirements.

• The purge gas should have a water dew point temperature of less
than -30 °C and be contaminant free. Refer to system drawings in the
“Supplemental Information” tab of this manual, or the Documentation
Package shipped with the analyzer

Do not attempt to make a connection to the vent flame arrestor


! fittings.
WARNING

Appendix B – Options | B-1


The purge gas consumption will be approximately proportional to the
supply pressure at the inlet flame arrestors. At a supply pressure range of
7–70 KPAG (1–10 PSIG ), the purge gas flow rate range should be between
10 and 100 SCCM (0.01 and 0.1 L/min or 0.02 and 0.2 SCFH). A large
cylinder of air or nitrogen can last as long as 1 1/2 years or as short as two
months, depending on the supply pressure. The low flow rate created by
7 KPAG (1 PSIG) supply pressure is sufficient to purge the enclosures, so
there is no advantage to using higher supply pressures; this only leads to
increased purge gas consumption.

UPPER ENCLOSURE

Figure B-1.
Inlet and vent flame
arrestor locations for LOWER ENCLOSURE
Environmental Purge
option.

B-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Pressure Compensation Option (Field Upgrade Available)
The Pressure Compensation option provides pressure correction and
diagnostics to the analyzer by adding a 0–700 KPA (0–100 PSIA; 0–5171.49
mmHg) pressure transducer to the Lower Enclosure. Optionally, a 210
KPAA (30 PSIA) pressure transducer can be used. The pressure transducer
location and plumbing is shown in the Overall Component Layout and
Lower Enclosure drawings located in the “Supplemental Information” tab
in this manual.

Setting Up the Pressure Compensation Option


This option is enabled using the Configurator Software. If your analyzer
was ordered with this option, it was set up and tested at the factory – no
further adjustment is required. If you are adding this option to your
analyzer, proceed as follows:

Before proceeding, test the area around the analyzer for hazardous
! gases and proceed only when the area is found to be safe.
WARNING
Do not remove the cover of the Explosion-Proof Digital Communica-
tions Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure and do not power up
the computer if there is a hazardous gas atmosphere present.

To set up the analyzer for the pressure compensation option:

1. Connect a laptop computer to the analyzer via the Explosion-Proof


Digital Communications Port on the front of the Lower Enclosure.

Start the computer and the Configurator Software and establish


communications with the analyzer. Refer to “Establishing Communi-
cation Between the Analyzer and Computer,” in Chapter 3.

2. From the Setup tab click the Cell/Misc button to view the Cell/Misc
(Compensation) Parameters dialog box (Figure B-2). Enter a value in
the Default Cell Pres field, as indicated in the instructions included
with the upgrade.

Appendix B – Options | B-3


Figure B-2.
Cell/Miscellaneous
(compensations)
parameters dialog box,
using the Pressure
Compensation option.

3. From the Analog Inputs dialog box (Figure B-3), enter Low scale and
High scale values for Cell Pres – as indicated on the instructions
shipped with the upgrade package – to activate the pressure compen-
sation measurement (refer to Chapter 4 and the instructions included
with the upgrade for more information).

Figure B-3.
Analog Inputs dialog
box.

B-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


To place the pressure compensation into fixed mode, enter a value in
the Default Cell Pres text field (i.e., the approximate Measuring Cell
pressure).

Jumpers on the Customer I/O Board are set up for a default pressure
 measurement range of 3413.2–5171.5 mmHg absolute (66–100
NOTE PSIA). Depending on the pressure transducer used, these jumpers
may have to be adjusted.

Refer to “Cell/Miscellaneous (Compensation) Parameters” in Chap-


ter 4 for information about these jumper positions. To determine the
pressure rating of the pressure transducer used by your analyzer, refer
to the customer-specific drawings in the “Supplemental Information”
tab of this manual or in the Documentation Package shipped with the
analyzer.

Using the Pressure Compensation Option


The analyzer will use the measured cell pressure to compensate for the effect
of pressure on the species concentrations. Adjust the Sample Gas pressure
gauge on the analyzer to the recommended pressure listed on the drawings
included in the “Supplemental Information” tab in this manual. Small devia-
tions in pressure due to regulator/gauge drift will be corrected automatically.

Diagnostics Feature

In addition to compensating for concentration measurements, the ana-


lyzer also uses the pressure measurements for diagnostics. If the sample
gas pressure drops to the Low Scale value, the analyzer activates a Fault
alarm (“f: Sample gas pressure too low”) to indicate that the sample gas
has been shut off. If you are performing an Auto-Zero calibration and the
zero gas pressure drops to the Low Scale value, the analyzer activates a
Warning alarm (“w: Cal gas pressure range”) to indicate that the zero gas
cylinder is empty or has been shut off. See the “Diagnostics and Trouble-
shooting” section in Chapter 6 for more information.

Appendix B – Options | B-5


Measuring Cells
Various Measuring Cells are available for use with the Model 931 and
Model 932 UV Analyzers.

For high concentration acid gas or high dewpoint applications, a heated


0.5 mm to 1 cm Measuring Cell is available. For other applications, un-
heated Measuring Cells of various lengths can be used.

For maintenance information and assembly drawings for these Measuring


Cells, refer to the separate Manuals Supplements in the “Supplemental
Information” tab in this manual.

Loop-Powered Current Outputs (Field Upgrade Available)


The standard analyzer comes with one self-powered current (V/I) output
configured for hydrogen sulfide concentration. This self-powered current
output can be replaced with an optional Loop-Powered Current Output.

Using the Loop-Powered Current Option


Loop-Powered Current Outputs are typically specified only when you
want to power the current output loop rather than using the analyzer to
do it.

• The user must supply an external power supply (15–30 VDC) capable
of supplying 25 mA per loop.

• The wiring of both types of current output is illustrated in the “Cus-


tomer Connections (I/O Board)” drawing included in the “Supplemen-
tal Information” tab of this manual and in the Documentation Package
shipped with the analyzer.

B-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Gas Sensor Interface Options
The analyzer has optional interface capabilities for up to three additional
gas sensors. These interfaces are located on the Micro-Interface board.

Gas sensor interface options include:

• 4–20 mA inputs.

• Half-bridge type sensors.

• Other types available; contact your AMETEK representative for infor-


mation.

If your application uses any of these optional gas sensors, refer to the
“Customer Connections (Micro-Interface Board)” drawing for wiring
details, such as termination points, options, and locations. This drawing is
included in the “Supplemental Information” tab of this manual and in the
Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

Digital Input (Contact Interface) Option


The analyzer has optional interface capability for one digital input contact.
This interface is located on the Micro-Interface Board. One application for
this interface is for operation with a flow switch.

The contact can be non-isolated or isolated (J106, Micro-Interface board).


In non-isolated configuration, the contact is energized from the board (15
VDC). In isolated configuration, the contact is energized from an external
source (15 V to 24 VDC).

If your application uses this digital input option, refer to the “Customer
Connections (Micro-Interface Board)” drawing for wiring details, such as
termination points, options, and locations. This drawing is included in the
“Supplemental Information” tab of this manual and in the Documentation
Package shipped with the analyzer.

Appendix B – Options | B-7


This page intentionally left blank.

B-8 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


APPENDIX C – MODBUS
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

The Modbus® communication interface is optional. This Appendix


 applies only to analyzers with this function added.
NOTE

Overview
This Appendix (M93x Modbus Register Layout, Revision E, 2004-03-19)
describes the customer serial communication interface on the Model 931
Single-Gas and Model 932 Multi-Gas Analyzers.

• Supported Modbus function codes are 03 (read multiple registers), 06


(write one register), and 16 (write multiple registers).

• The analyzer responds to Modbus queries that match its assigned


node address from either the customer data acquisition port (RS-485)
or the service ports (RS-232 and RS-485).

• The analyzer also responds to Modbus queries with the special node
address of 255 from the service ports (RS-232 and RS-485). This acts as
a back-door access to the analyzer when the assigned node address is
unknown. The special node address should only be used when di-
rectly connecting to the analyzer (i.e., not in a multi-drop environ-
ment).

• The service ports settings are fixed at 9600 8-N-1.

• When the analyzer Modbus node address or any of communication


parameters is changed, the change takes effect on the next query.

Appendix C – Modbus Communication Interface | C-1


Holding Registers
References to a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, m, n, o, q, r, s in the Holding Register Defini-
tions are described following the Holding Registers.

References to 93x indicate the Holding Register Definitions apply to


Model 931 and Model 932 Analyzers.

REG DEFINITION UNITS SCALING ACCESS


a b
0 Concentration Result 1 1; 10000 r
(93x)
a
1 Concentration Result 2 1; 10000 r
(932)
a
2 Concentration Result 3 1; 10000 r
(932)
a
3 Concentration Result 4 1; 10000 r
(932)
a
4 Concentration Result 5 1; 10000 r
(932)
a
5 Concentration Result 6 1; 10000 r
(932)
6 Sensor 1 Concentration Result % 100 r
(93x)
7 Sensor 2 Concentration Result % 100 r
(93x)
8 Sensor 3 Concentration Result % 100 r
(93x)
9–41 Reserved – – r
42 Time to Next Auto-Zero min 1 r
(-1 = Auto-Zero disabled)
(93x)
43 Time to Next Auto-Calibration min 1 r
(-1 = Auto-Calibration disabled)
(93x)
44 Time to end of Calibration sec 1 r
(-1 = No Calibration in progress)
(93x)
45 Time to next Stream Switching sec 1 r
(-1 = Stream Switching not active)
(93x)
46–47 HC run time sec 1 r
(1st register= lower 16 bits; 2nd register = upper 16 bits)
(93x)
48–49 OBMC run time sec 1 r
(1st register= lower 16 bits; 2nd register = upper 16 bits)
(93x)
50–58 Reserved
Track & Hold Concentration Result of Registers 0 to 8 Reg0 to Reg8 Reg0 to Reg8 r
(93x)

C-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


REG DEFINITION UNITS SCALING ACCESS
59–79 Reserved – – r
c
80–89 HC Status Code history 1 to 5 – 1 r
(93x)
d
90–99 OBMC Status Code history 1 to 5 – 1 r
(93x)
100–101 Reserved – – r
102 Bench Temperature °C 10 r
(93x)
103 Cell Temperature °C 10 r
(93x)
104 Cell Pressure mmHg 1 r
(93x)
105–106 Reserved – – r
107 Probe Temperature °C 10 r
(93x)
108–109 Reserved – – r
110 Filter Wheel Speed RPM 1 r
(932)
111–116 Lamp Pulse for Optical Filters 1 to 6 mV 1 r
(932)
Filters 1 and 2 only
(931)
117–118 Reserved – – r
119 Bench Heater Duty Cycle % 1 r
(93x)
120 Cell Heater Duty Cycle % 1 r
(93x)
121–126 Reference PMT signal of Optical Filters 1 to 6 mV 1 r
(932)
Filters 1 and 2 only
(931)
127–132 Measurement PMT signal of Optical Filters 1 to 6 mV 1 r
(932)
Filters 1 and 2 only
(931)
133–135 Reserved – – r
136 Probe Heater Duty Cycle % 1 r
(93x)
137–151 Reserved – – r
e
152 Analyzer Operating Mode – 1 r
(93x)
f
153 HC Warning Status Bits – 1 r
(93x)
g
154 HC Fault Status Bits – 1 r
(93x)
h
155 OBMC Warning Status Bits – 1 r
(93x)
i
156 OBMC Fault Status Bits – 1 r
(93x)

Appendix C – Modbus Communication Interface | C-3


REG DEFINITION UNITS SCALING ACCESS
j
157 Digital Input Bit Image – 1 r
(93x)
k
158–159 Digital Output Bit Image – 1 r,w
(93x)
160–165 Reserved
a
Span Gas Concentration of Results 1 to 6 1 r,w
(932)
Span Gas 1 only
(931)
166–168 Span Gas Concentration of Sensor Results 1 to 3 % 100 r,w
(93x)
169 Reserved – – –
170 Auto-Zero Gas Flow Duration min 1 r,w
(93x)
171 Auto-Span1 Gas Flow Duration min 1 r,w
(93x)
172 Auto-Span2 Gas Flow Duration min 1 r,w
(93x)
173 Stream Switching Interval sec 1 r,w
(93x)
174 Sample Return Time Delay sec 1 r,w
(93x)
175 Auto-Zero Interval hr 1 r,w
(93x)
176 Auto-Calibration Interval hr 1 r,w
(93x)
177 Calibration Integration Duration sec 1 r,w
(93x)
178 Flow-Switch Alarm Type – 1 r,w
(93x)
0 = Warning
1 = Fault
179 Flow-Switch Alarm Activation Time Delay sec 1 r,w
(93x)
j
180 Solenoid Assignment Value for Zero Flow – 1 r,w
(93x)
181 Solenoid Assignment Value for Span1 Flow – 1 r,w
(93x)
182 Solenoid Assignment Value for Span2 Flow – 1 r,w
(93x)
183 Solenoid Assignment Value for Stream A Flow – 1 r,w
(93x)
184 Solenoid Assignment Value for Stream B Flow – 1 r,w
(93x)
m
185 Calibrating Species to Auto-Span1 Mapping – 1 r,w
(93x)
m
186 Calibrating Species to Auto-Span2 Mapping – 1 r,w
(93x)
187–188 Reserved – – –

C-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


REG DEFINITION UNITS SCALING ACCESS
189 Gas Flow Control – 1 r,w
(93x)
0 = Auto
1 = Shut-in/off
2 = Zero
3 = Span1
4 = Span2
5 = Stream A
6 = Stream B
7 = Sample
190 Stream Selection – 1 r,w
(93x)
-1 = none
0 = Stream A
1 = Stream B
191 Stream Switching Control – 1 r,w
(93x)
0 = Auto
1 = Digital Input
2 = Modbus
192–194 Reserved – – –
195 Default Cell Temperature °C 10 r,w
(93x)
196 Default Cell Pressure mmHg 1 r,w
(93x)
197–202 Zero Transmittance of Optical Filters 1 to 6 – 10000 r,w
(932)
Filters 1 and 2 only
(931)
203–208 Span Factor of Concentration Results 1 to 6 – 1000 r,w
(932)
Span Factor 1 only
(931)
209–211 Span Factor of Sensor Results 1 to 3 – 1000 r,w
(93x)
212 Reserved – – –
213–216 Zero Calibration Reading of Current (I) mA 1000 r,w
Output Channels 1 to 4
(93x)
217–220 Span Calibration Reading of Current (I) mA 1000 r,w
Output Channels 1 to 4
(93x)
221–224 Zero Calibration Reading of Voltage (V) mV 1 r,w
Output Channels 1 to 4
(93x)
225–228 Span Calibration Reading of Voltage (V) mV 1 r,w
Output Channels 1 to 4
(93x)
229 Enable Sensor Result Calculation – 1 r,w
(93x)
b0 = Sensor 1
b1 = Sensor 2
b2 = Sensor 3
b4–b15 = Reserved
230–231 Voltage Input Offset in Terms of PWM Duty Cycle % 1 r,w
for Sensor 2 and Sensor 3
(93x)

Appendix C – Modbus Communication Interface | C-5


REG DEFINITION UNITS SCALING ACCESS
232–239 OBMC Analog Inputs 1 to 8 mV 1 r
(93x)
240–245 Transmittance of Optical Filters 1 to 6 – 10000 r
(932)
Filters 1 and 2 only
(931)
246–251 Absorbance of Optical Filters 1 to 6 – 10000 r
(932)
Filters 1 and 2 only
(931)
252–253 Result Assignment of Concentration Alarms 1 to 2 – 1 r,w
(93x)
a
254–255 Reserved 1 r,w
On-Threshold of Concentration Alarms 1 to 2
(93x)
a
256–257 Reserved 1 r,w
Off-Threshold of Concentration Alarms 1 to 2
(93x)
258–259 Time Delay of Concentration Alarms 1 to 2 sec 1 r,w
(93x)
260–261 Enable Latching of Concentration Alarms 1 to 2 – 1 r,w
(93x)
262 Enable Latching of Fail Alarm – 1 r,w
(93x)
n
263–265 Name of Sensor Result 1 (6 Characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(93x)
266–268 Name of Sensor Result 2 (6 Characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(93x)
269–271 Name of Sensor Result 3 (6 Characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(93x)
272–279 HC Software Version (16 Characters) – ASCII text string r
(93x)
280–287 OBMC Software Version (16 Characters) – ASCII text string r
(93x)
288–289 Reserved – – –
290 Modbus Node Address – 1 r,w
(93x)
291 Modbus Serial Communication Baud Rate – 1 r,w
(93x)
0 = 9600
1 = 4800
2 = 2400
3 = 1200
292 Modbus Serial Communication Stop Bits – 1 r,w
(93x)
1 = 1 Stop Bit
2 = 1.5 Stop Bits
3 = 2 Stop Bits
293 Modbus Serial Communication Parity – 1 r,w
(93x)
0 = none
1 = odd
3 = even

C-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


REG DEFINITION UNITS SCALING ACCESS
294–298 Reserved – – –
299 EEPROM-Write Counter – 1 r
(93x)
o
300 Analyzer Action Request – 1 r,w
(93x)
301 Key Filter – 1 r,w
(93x)
302–307 Lamp Control Pulse for Optical Filters 1 to 6 mV 1 r,w
(932)
Pulses 1 and 2 only
(931)
308–309 Base Pulse Control for Lamps 1 to 2 mV 1 r,w
(93x)
310 Maximum Lamp Pulse mV 1 r,w
(93x)
311 PMT Level Gain Control mV 1 r,w
(93x)
312 PMT Balance Gain Control mV 1 r,w
(93x)
313 Maximum PMT Signal mV 1 r,w
(93x)
p
314 Service Host Configuration Parameter – 1 r,w
(93x)
315 Reserved – – r,w
q
316 Bench Type – 1 r,w
(93x)
317 PMT Signal Acquisition Samples – 1 r,w
(93x)
318 PMT Signal Acquisition Delay – 1 r,w
(93x)
319 Reserved – – –
320 T90 Time Constant sec 1 r,w
(93x)
321 Enable ALC – 1 r,w
(93x)
322–327 ALC Gain for Optical Filters 1 to 6 – 1 r,w
(932)
Filters 1 and 2 only
(931)
328–333 ALC Set Point for Optical Filters 1 to 6 mV 1 r,w
(932)
Filters 1 and 2 only
(931)
r
334 Algorithm Setting – 1 r,w
(93x)
335 Cell Pressure When Zero Calibrating Sensor 2 mmHg 1 r,w
(93x)
336 Reserved – – –

Appendix C – Modbus Communication Interface | C-7


REG DEFINITION UNITS SCALING ACCESS
337 Signal Reading When Zero Calibrating Sensor 2 mV 1 r,w
(93x)
338 Gas 1 Concentration in Sensor 2 Zero Gas % 100 r,w
(93x)
339 Gas 2 Concentration in Sensor 2 Zero Gas % 100 r,w
(93x)
340 Gas 1 Concentration in Sensor 2 Process Gas % 100 r,w
(93x)
341 Gas 2 Concentration in Sensor 2 Process Gas % 100 r,w
(93x)
342–352 Reserved – – –
353–354 Cell Pressure Management Range mmHg 1 r,w
(93x)
1st Register = Low Scale
2nd Register = High Scale
355–356 Bench Temperature Upper/Lower Limit °C 10 r,w
(93x)
357–358 Cell Temperature Upper/Lower Limit °C 10 r,w
(93x)
359–360 Probe Temperature Upper/Lower Limit °C 10 r,w
(93x)
361–363 UV Result Select for Compensating Sensor Result 1 to 3 – 1 r,w
364 Bench Temperature Measurement Range – 1 r,w
(93x)
365 Cell Temperature Measurement Range – 1 r,w
(93x)
366–367 Reserved – – –
368 Bench Temperature Control Set Point °C 10 r,w
(93x)
369 Cell Temperature Control Set Point °C 10 r,w
(93x)
370–371 Reserved – – –
372 Bench Temperature Control Start-Up Duty Cycle % 1 r,w
(93x)
373 Cell Temperature Control Start-Up Duty Cycle % 1 r,w
(93x)
374–377 Result Assignment of Voltage (V) Output Channels 1 to 4 – 1 r,w
(93x)
378–381 Result Assignment of Current (I) Output Channels 1 to 4 – 1 r,w
(93x)
382–385 Name of Species 1 (7 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(93x)
386–389 Name of Species 2 (7 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(932)
390–393 Name of Species 3 (7 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(932)
394–397 Name of Species 4 (7 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(932)

C-8 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


REG DEFINITION UNITS SCALING ACCESS
398–401 Name of Species 5 (7 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(932)
402–405 Name of Species 6 (7 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(932)
406–413 Analyzer Serial Number (16 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(93x)
414–418 Service Host Password 1 (10 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(93x)
419–423 Service Host Password 2 (10 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(93x)
424–427 Unit Conversion Name 1 (8 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(93x)
428–431 Unit Conversion Name 2 (8 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(932)
432–435 Unit Conversion Name 3 (8 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(932)
436–439 Unit Conversion Name 4 (8 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(932)
440–443 Unit Conversion Name 5 (8 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(932)
444–447 Unit Conversion Name 6 (8 characters) – ASCII text string r,w
(932)
448–449 Cell Length cm floating-point values r,w
a
450–457 High Scale of Current (I) Output Channels 1 to 4 floating-point value r,w
(93x)
458–469 Matrix Row 1 Elements 1 to 6 – floating-point value r,w
(932)
k-value 1 & 2 only
(931)
470–481 Matrix Row 2 Elements 1 to 6 – floating-point value r,w
(932)
482–493 Matrix Row 3 Elements 1 to 6 – floating-point value r,w
(932)
494–505 Matrix Row 4 Elements 1 to 6 – floating-point value r,w
(932)
506–517 Matrix Row 5 Elements 1 to 6 – floating-point value r,w
(932)
518–529 Matrix Row 6 Elements 1 to 6 – floating-point value r,w
(932)
a
530–541 Units Conversion Factors of Concentration Results 1 to 6 floating-point value r,w
(932)
Result 1 only
(931)
a
542–553 Zero Calibration Drift Specification of Results 1 to 6 floating-point value r,w
(932)
Result 1 only
(931)
a
554–561 Low Scale of Current (I) Output Channels 1 to 4 floating-point value r,w
(93x)
a
562–569 High Scale of Voltage (V) Output Channels 1 to 4 floating-point value r,w
(93x)

Appendix C – Modbus Communication Interface | C-9


REG DEFINITION UNITS SCALING ACCESS
a
570–577 Low Scale of Voltage (V) Output Channels 1 to 4 floating-point value r,w
(93x)
578–579 Compressibility Correction Factor – floating-point value r,w
(93x)
580–581 Sigma of Adaptive Filtering – floating-point value r,w
(93x)
582–595 Linearization Compensation Coefficients 1 to 7 – floating-point value r,w
(932)
596–601 α, ß, Υ Constants for Sensor 2 Result Calculation – floating-point value –
(93x)
602–603 SH2 Constants for Sensor 2 Result Calculation – floating-point value –
(93x)
604–605 QH2 Constants for Sensor 2 Result Calculation – floating-point value –
(93x)
606–611 Compensation Factor of UV Result onto Sensor Results 1 to 3 – floating-point value –
(93x)
612–627 Reserved – floating-point value –
628–631 Bench/Cell Temperature Control Kp °C floating-point value r,w
(93x)
632–635 Reserved – floating-point value –
636–639 Bench/Cell Temperature Control Ti sec floating-point value r,w
(93x)
640–647 Reserved – floating-point value –
648–655 Probe Temperature Control Parameters °C, °C floating-point value r,w
(93x) sec, %
Set Point
Kp
Ti
Start-Up Duty Cycle
a
656–667 Span Gas of Concentration Results 1–6 floating-point value r,w
(932)
Span Gas 1 Only
(931)
a
668–671 On-Threshold of Concentration Alarms 1 and 2 floating-point value r,w
(93x)
a
672–675 Off-Threshold of Concentration Alarms 1 and 2 floating-point value r,w
(93x)
676–679 Reserved – floating-point value –
a
680–691 Concentration Results floating-point value r
Result 1 Only
(931)
Results 1–6
(932)
692–697 Sensor Results 1–3 % floating-point value r
(93x)
698–699 Reserved – floating-point value –

C-10 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


REG DEFINITION UNITS SCALING ACCESS
a
700–711 Track-and-Hold Concentration Results floating-point value r
Result 1 Only
(931)
Results 1–6
(932)
712–717 Track-and-Hold Sensor Results 1–3 % floating-point value r
(93x)
718–719 Reserved – floating-point value –

a Each concentration result is the product of a concentration value generated internally


by the analyzer and multiplied by its corresponding Unit Conversion Factor.
The default unit of measurement for concentration result is PPMV when the Unit
Conversion Factor is the default value of 1.0. However, the concentration result unit
can be changed (for example, 1.0e-4 for %).

 The concentration result, the zero drift specification, the span gas
concentration, and the alarm thresholds of a gas species must be in the
NOTE
same unit of measurement.

b When the analyzer is used to output absorbance or transmittance, the scaling factor of
10000 is used instead of 100 which is for concentration output.

c Each pair of registers represents the HC Warning and Fault bits as defined in registers
153 and 154. The first pair is the newest while the last pair is the oldest.

d Each pair of registers represents the OBMC Warning and Fault bits as defined in
registers 155 and 156. The first pair is the newest while the last pair is the oldest.

e Analyzer operating mode consists of two bytes.


Low byte indicates analyzer system operating state:
0 = Start-up Shut-in/off 1 = Start-up Time Delay
2 = Operational 3 = Alarm Clearing
High byte indicates Bench setup state:
0 = Off/Completed 1 = Adjusting PMT Level
2 = Adjusting Lamp Pulses 3 = Adjusting PMT Balance
4 = Adjusting PMT Level 5 = Adjusting Lamp Pulses
6 = Setting Up ALC

Appendix C – Modbus Communication Interface | C-11


f Analyzer HC Warning status bits:

Bit Description (0 = Normal; 1 = Warning)

0 EEPROM Full

1 Analog Output Out of Range

2 Probe Temperature Out of Range (if not controlling)

3 Excessive Zero Drift

4 Calibration Gas Pressure Out of Range

5 Sample Gas Pressure Too High

6 Low-Flow Detected (if set up as a warning)

7–15 Reserved

g Analyzer HC Fault status bits:

Bit Description (0 = Normal; 1 = Fault)

0 HC-OBMC Communication Problem

1 Analytical Data Not Received

2 Sample Gas Pressure Too Low

3 On-Chip A/D Not Responding

4 Probe Temperature Too Low (if controlling)

5 Probe Temperature Too High (if controlling)

6 Low-Flow Detected (if set up as a fault)

7–15 Reserved

h Analyzer OBMC Warning status bits:

Bit Description (0 = Normal; 1 = Warning)

0 PMT Signals Out of Range

1 ALC Out of Range

2 Cell Temperature Out of Range (if not controlling)

3 Bench Temperature Out of Range

4 Bench Auto-Setup Problem

5–15 Reserved

C-12 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


i Analyzer OBMC Fault status bits:

Bit Description (0 = Normal; 1 = Fault)

0 Filter Wheel Speed Out of Range

1 On-Board A/D Not Responding

2 On-Chip A/D Not Responding

3 OBMC-HC Communication Problem

4 Cell Temperature Out of Range (if controlling)

5–15 Reserved

j Digital input bits:

Bit Definition Value


0 Auto-Calibration Request Input 0 = off (open)
1 = start (closed)
1 Concentration Alarm Hard-Enable Input 0 = disable (open)
1 = enable (closed)
2–7 Reserved —
8 Stream Selection Input 0 = Stream A (open)
1 = Stream B (closed)
9 Flow Switch Input 0 = normal (open)
1 = low or no flow (closed)
10–15 Reserved —

k Digital output bits:

Bit Definition Access


0 Auto-Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(93x)
1 Auto-Zero Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(93x)
2 Auto-Span1 Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(93x)
3 Auto-Span2 Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(93x)
4 Reserved r,w
5 Manual Sensor 1 Span Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(93x)
6 Manual Sensor 2 Span Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(93x)
7 Manual Sensor 3 Span Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(93x)
8 Manual Zero Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(93x)
(Continued next page)

Appendix C – Modbus Communication Interface | C-13


Bit Definition Access
9 Manual Span1 Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(93x)
10 Manual Span2 Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(932)
11 Manual Span3 Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(932)
12 Manual Span4 Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(932)
13 Manual Span5 Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(932)
14 Manual Span6 Calibration (0 = off/abort; 1 = on/start) r,w
(932)
15–22 Reserved r,w
23 Concentration Alarm Soft Enable (0 = disable; 1 = enable) r,w
24 Fault Relay (0 = fault; 1 = normal) r
25 Warning Relay (0 = warning; 1 = normal) r
26 Concentration Alarm Invalid Relay (0 = invalid; 1 = valid) r
27 Concentration Alarm1 (0 = off; 1 = on) r
28 Concentration Alarm2 (0 = off; 1 = on) r
29 Solenoid A (0 = off; 1 = on) r
30 Solenoid B (0 = off; 1 = on) r
31 Solenoid Z (0 = off; 1 = on) r

m Calibrating species to Auto-Span flow mapping allows the specifications of which


species is being calibrated when an Auto-Span flow is activated. Multi-species bits
could be set for a particular Auto-Span flow.

Bit Definition
0 Species 1 (93x)
1 Species 2 (932)
2 Species 3 (932)
3 Species 4 (932)
4 Species 5 (932)
5 Species 6 (932)
6 Sensor 1 (93x)
7 Sensor 2 (93x)
8 Sensor 3 (93x)
9–15 Reserved

C-14 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


n An ASCII character string must be read as a block of registers. To conform to the
Modicon PLC convention, 2 characters are stored in each register. The upper byte (bits
15–8) contains the first character to be displayed while the second character to be
displayed is in the lower byte (bits 7–0). The number of characters indicated for each
parameter includes the NUL terminating character.

o Action request bits:

Bit Definition (set a bit to start an action)


0 Save Parameters to EEPROM
1 Auto-Setup of Optical Bench
2 Zero Calibration of Analog Outputs
3 Span Calibration of Analog Outputs
4 Mid-Scale Check of Analog Outputs
5–14 Reserved
15 Reset Analyzer

p Service host configuration parameter is used by the service host software application
to store the user-preference information (e.g., show temperature and pressure in
imperial units). The definition and meaning of the parameter is outside the scope of
this document and its value has no effect on analyzer operation.

q Bench type bits:

Bit Definition
0 Bench Orientation:
0 = normal
1 = reserved
1–3 Optical Filter Pulsing Sequence
000 = 1-3-5, 4-6-2
001 = 3-5, 4-6-1-2
010 = 1-3-4-5, 6-2
011 = motorless (1-3-2)
100 = 1-3-5, 4-6-1(2)
4–15 Reserved

Appendix C – Modbus Communication Interface | C-15


r Algorithm setting bits:

Bit Definition (1 = select; 0 = deselect)


0 NDR Compensation (932)
1 Linearization Compensation 1 (932)
2 Linearization Compensation 2 (932)
3–7 Reserved
8 Skip Temperature/Pressure Compensation and
Measurement Unit Scaling (93x)
9 Regenerate Transmittance (93x)
10–15 Reserved

s Each pair of registers represents a 32-bit floating-point value. The order of the
registers holding one floating-point value is implemented in the de facto standard
manner (i.e., the first register holds the lower 16-bits while the second register holds
the upper 16-bits of a 32-bit floating-point value).

C-16 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


APPENDIX D – DRAWINGS

This appendix contains drawings included in the main body of this


manual, additional assembly drawings that can be used for advanced
maintenance purposes, and extra drawings that are not included in the
main body of this manual.

If advanced maintenance procedures are not included in this manual,


contact AMETEK for assistance on changing out replaceable parts.

Drawings that are customer-specific are included in the “Supplemen-


 tal Information” tab of this manual, and in the Documentation
NOTE
Package shipped with the analyzer. For installation and maintenance/
diagnostic purposes, use these drawings in place of the associated
drawings in the manual.

Drawings of Measuring Cells not discussed in this manual are located


in separate Manual Supplements, also included in the “Supplemental
Information” tab of this manual.

Appendix D – Drawings | D-1


Upper Enclosure Layout

LOOSE CLAMPED

OPTICAL BENCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

 This drawing illustrates a Model 932 Optical Bench Assembly (with a


Filter Chopper Assembly that can provide analysis for up to six gas
NOTE
species).

D-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Lower Enclosure Layout

 See “Customer Connection, I/O Board” and “Conduit Entries and AC


Power Connection Locations,” later in this appendix, for details about
NOTE
customer termination points and cable/conduit entries.

Appendix D – Drawings | D-3


Backpan Component Layout

PROCESS INSTRUMENTS

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT


DO NOT OPEN IF A HAZARDOUS
GAS ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT

MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN


8 7 6 5
12
9

11 10

1 2 3 4
SOLENOID BLOCK DETAIL

 This drawing illustrates general locations of components that make up


a North American-style analyzer; the sample system and plumbing
NOTE
may be different for your application.

For actual drawings of your analyzer system, refer to the “Supplemen-


tal Information” tab of this manual or the Documentation Package
shipped with the analyzer.

D-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


AC Distribution PWB (P/N 100-1771)

Appendix D – Drawings | D-5


Customer I/O Board (P/N 100-1758)

D-6 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Customer Connections, I/O Board (120 VAC)
I/O BOARD CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS

120VAC POWER TERMINATIONS

OR

OR

 This drawing is an example of a 120 VAC style Customer Connec-


tions drawing. For a customer-specific drawing for your application,
NOTE
refer to the “Supplemental Information” tab of this manual or the
Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.

Appendix D – Drawings | D-7


Host Controller Board (P/N 100-1757)

D-8 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Customer Connections, Host Controller Board (North America/
Europe)
HC BOARD CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS

OR

OR

Appendix D – Drawings | D-9


RS-485 Port Terminations and Bias Options (Host Controller
Board)
A
RX+
R J302 (Customer Data Acquisition) J303 (Remote Service Port)
B
RX- JP305 2-3 JP307 2-3
JP306 2-3 JP308 2-3
(a) JP309 2-3 JP311 2-3
JP310 2-3 JP312 2-3
Y JP313 2-3 JP315 2-3
TX+
D JP314 2-3 JP316 2-3
Z
TX-

A
RX+
R J302 (Customer Data Acquisition) J303 (Remote Service Port)
B 130
RX- JP305 1-2 JP307 1-2
JP306 1-2 JP308 1-2

(b) JP309 2-3 JP311 2-3


JP310 2-3 JP312 2-3
Y JP313 2-3 JP315 2-3
TX+
D JP314 2-3 JP316 2-3
130

Z
TX-

+5V
619

A
RX+
R J302 (Customer Data Acquisition) J303 (Remote Service Port)
B
RX- JP305 2-3 JP307 2-3
JP306 JP308
619

2-3 2-3
(c) +5V JP309 1-2 JP311 1-2
JP310 1-2 JP312 1-2
619

Y JP313 1-2 JP315 1-2


TX+
D JP314 1-2 JP316 1-2
Z
TX-
619

+5V
619

A
RX+
R J302 (Customer Data Acquisition) J303 (Remote Service Port)
130

B
RX- JP305 1-2 JP307 1-2
JP306 JP308
619

1-2 1-2
(d) +5V JP309 1-2 JP311 1-2
JP310 1-2 JP312 1-2
619

Y JP313 1-2 JP315 1-2


TX+
D JP314 1-2 JP316 1-2
130

Z
TX-
NOTE: RESISTANCE VALUES IN OHMS.
619

 Use this drawing for multiple-analyzer (multi-drop) applications.


NOTE

D-10 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Microcontroller Board (P/N 100-1781)

Appendix D – Drawings | D-11


Micro-Interface Board (P/N 100-1898)

 If your application uses optional Gas Sensor/Digital Input interfaces,


refer to the customer specific Micro-Interface Board (Customer
NOTE
Connections) drawing in the “Supplemental Information” tab of this
manual, or in the Documentation Package shipped with the analyzer.
This drawing shows termination points, options, and locations.

D-12 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Optical Bench Service Electronics Board (P/N 100-1662)

Appendix D – Drawings | D-13


Conduit Entries and AC Power Connection Locations (North
America)

LOWER ENCLOSURE

DETAIL A

 This drawing illustrates a basic analyzer used in North American-


style applications. Your application may differ. Refer to the “Supple-
NOTE
mental Information” tab of this manual or the Documentation Pack-
age shipped with the analyzer for the actual drawing for your ana-
lyzer.

D-14 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


RS-232 Cable Communications Connections

Appendix D – Drawings | D-15


Analyzer Wiring Diagram

OR

D-16 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Inlet and Vent Flame Arrestor Locations for Environmental Purge
Option

UPPER ENCLOSURE

LOWER ENCLOSURE

Appendix D – Drawings | D-17


PMT Buffer Board (P/N 100-0140-2)

D-18 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Optical Bench Assembly (Model 932)

This drawing illustrates an Optical Bench Assembly used on Model


 932 Analyzers (includes a Filter Chopper Wheel). The intent of this
NOTE drawing is to illustrate the location of components that make up the
Optical Bench Assembly. Other than the Filter Chopper Wheel, the
Optical Bench Assembly is the same as on Model 931 Analyzers.

Appendix D – Drawings | D-19


Solenoid Block (North American), 100-1892

D-20 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


Solenoid Block (European), 100-1893

Appendix D – Drawings | D-21


This page intentionally left blank.

D-22 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


APPENDIX E – CONVERSION FACTORS
AND CALCULATIONS

Conversion Factors
PARAMETER TO CONVERT FROM: TO: MULTIPLY BY:
AMOUNT of SUBSTANCE lb mol kmol 0.453 592 4
g mol kmol 0.001
(for Ideal gas) m3 of gas (0 °C, 101.325 kPa) kmol 0.044 615 8
m of gas (15 °C, 101.325 kPa)
3
kmol 0.042 493 2
ft of gas (60 °F, 1.0 atm)
3
kmol 0.001 195 30

AREA ft2 m2 0.092 903 04


in 2
mm 2
645.16
in 2
cm 2
6.451 6
yd 2
m 2
0.836 172 4

CAPACITY bbl (42 gal US) m3 0.158 987 3


fl oz (UK) cm 3
28.413 05
fl oz (US) cm 3
29.573 53
gal (UK) m3 0.004 546 092
gal (UK) L 4.546 092
gal (US) m 3
0.003 785 412
gal (US) L 3.785 412

CONCENTRATION grains/100 ft3 mg/m3 22.883 51


lb mol/ft 3
kmol/m 3
16.018 46
ppm percent 0.000 1
ppm by volume cm 3/m3 1.0
ppm by weight mg/kg 1.0
weight percent kg/kg 0.01

Conversion Factors and Calculations | E-1


PARAMETER TO CONVERT FROM: TO: MULTIPLY BY:
DENSITY (Gases) lb/ft3 kg/m3 16.018 46

DENSITY (Liquids) lb/gal (UK) kg/L 0.099 776 44


lb/gal (US) kg/L 0.119 826 4
lb/ft 3
kg/L 0.016 018 46
g/cm3 kg/L 1.0

DENSITY (Solids) lb/ft3 kg/L 0.016 018 46

ENERGY BTU kJ 1.055 056


cal kJ 0.004 184
kcal kJ 4.184
kWh kJ 3600.0

FLOW RATE bbl/d t/a 58.030 36


bbl/h mh 3
0.158 987 3
gal (UK)/min m 3h 0.272 765 5
gal (US)/min mh 3
0.227 124 7
ft /h
3
mh 3
0.028 316 85
ft /h
3
L/min 0.471 947 5
ft3/min L/s 0.471 947 5
lb/h t/d 0.010 886 22
lb mole/h kmol/h 0.453 592 4
ton (2240 lb)/d kg/h 42.335 290 7
ton (2000 lb)/d kg/h 37.799 366 7

LENGTH ft m 0.304 8
in mm 25.4
yd m 0.914 40

MASS grain mg 64.798 91


lb kg 0.453 592 4
oz (avoirdupois) g 28.349 52
oz (troy) g 31.103 48
ton (2240 lb) t 1.016 047
ton (2000 lb) t 0.907 184 7

POWER BTU/min kW 0.017 584 27


BTU/s kW 1.055 056
hp kW 0.746
million BTU/h MW 0.293 071 1

E-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


PARAMETER TO CONVERT FROM: TO: MULTIPLY BY:
PRESSURE ATM kPa 101.325
bar kPa 100.0
cm of H2O (4 °C) kPa 0.098 063 8
in of Hg (32 °F) kPa 3.386 388 157
in of Hg (60 °F) kPa 3.376 85
in of H2O (39.2 °F) kPa 0.249 082
in of H2O (60 °F) kPa 0.248 84
mm of Hg = torr (0 °C) kPa 0.133 322 4
psi kPa 6.984 757

SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY BTU/lb * °F kJ/kg * °C 4.186 8


kcal/kg * °C kJ/kg * °C 4.184
kW * h/kg * °C kJ/kg * °C 3 600.0
BTU/lb mol * °F kJ/kmol * °C 4.186 8
cal/g mol * °C kJ/kmol * °C 4.184

SPEED ft/s m/s 0.304 8


in/s mm/s 2.54
mile/h km/h 1.609 344

TEMPERATURE °R K 0.555 555 555


°F-32 °C 0.555 555 555
Fahrenheit degree Celsius degree 0.555 555 555

VOLUME ft3 m3 0.02831685


in 3
cm 3
16.387 06
yd3 m3 0.764 554 9

Conversion Factors and Calculations | E-3


Prefixes
FACTOR
(by which unit is multiplied) PREFIX SYMBOL EXAMPLE
One million million (billion) 10 12
tera T
One thousand million 109 giga G gigahertz (GHz)
One million 106 mega M megawatt (MW)
One thousand 103 kilo k kilometre (km)
One hundred 10 2
hecto* h
Ten 101 deca* da decagram (dag)
UNITY 1
One tenth 10-1 deci* d decimetre (dm)
One hundredth 10 -2
centi* c centimetre (cm)
One thousandth 10-3 milli m milligram (mg)
One millionth 10-6 micro μ microsecond (μs)
One thousand millionth 10-9 nano n nanosecond (ns)
One million millionth 10-12 pico p picofarad (pF)
One thousand million millionth 10-15 femto f
One million million millionth 10-18 atto a
* To be avoided wherever possible.

E-4 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzer


SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION

This chapter consists of information that supports the operation of this


analyzer. All information in this chapter comprises the Documentation
Package. A duplicate of the Documentation Package is also shipped with
the analyzer.

Information typically included in this chapter includes:

• A Parameter List, which lists all factory-programmed settings.

• Quality Control/factory information.

• Customer-specific system drawings that include customer installation


responsibilities and requirements, a flow diagram, mounting informa-
tion, customer-specific component layout diagram, and a customer
connection diagram. Other drawings may also be included as re-
quired.

• Manual Supplements – that describe and illustrate (if/as applicable)


installation, operation, and maintenance procedures for specific
components or optional equipment that make up your sample system.

Supplements are typically used for Measuring Cells, nonstandard or


optional equipment, or information that is intended to replace similar
information in the User Manual.

• Other customer-specific information may also be included (applica-


tion-specific).

Supplemental Information | S-1


This page intentionally left blank.

S-2 | Model 931 and Model 932 UV Analyzers

You might also like